diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/config/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/config/chapter.sgml
index db3ff9ed20..14cdcae0dd 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/config/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/config/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,3100 +1,3100 @@
ChernLeeWritten by MikeSmithBased on a tutorial written by MattDillonAlso based on tuning(7) written by Configuration and TuningSynopsissystem configurationsystem optimizationOne of the important aspects of &os; is system configuration.
Correct system configuration will help prevent headaches during future upgrades.
This chapter will explain much of the &os; configuration process,
including some of the parameters which
can be set to tune a &os; system.
After reading this chapter, you will know:How to efficiently work with
file systems and swap partitions.The basics of rc.conf configuration and
/usr/local/etc/rc.d startup systems.How to configure and test a network card.How to configure virtual hosts on your network devices.How to use the various configuration files in
/etc.How to tune &os; using sysctl
variables.How to tune disk performance and modify kernel
limitations.Before reading this chapter, you should:Understand &unix; and &os; basics ().Be familiar with the basics of kernel configuration/compilation
().Initial ConfigurationPartition Layoutpartition layout/etc/var/usrBase PartitionsWhen laying out file systems with &man.disklabel.8;
or &man.sysinstall.8;, remember that hard
drives transfer data faster from the outer
tracks to the inner.
Thus smaller and heavier-accessed file systems
should be closer to the outside of the drive, while
larger partitions like /usr should be placed
toward the inner. It is a good idea to create
partitions in a similar order to: root, swap,
/var, /usr.The size of /var
reflects the intended machine usage.
/var is used to hold
mailboxes, log files, and printer spools. Mailboxes and log
files can grow to unexpected sizes depending
on how many users exist and how long log
files are kept. Most users would never require a gigabyte,
but remember that /var/tmp
must be large enough to contain packages.
The /usr partition holds much
of the files required to support the system, the &man.ports.7;
collection (recommended) and the source code (optional). Both
of which are optional at install time.
At least 2 gigabytes would be recommended for this partition.When selecting partition sizes, keep the space
requirements in mind. Running out of space in
one partition while barely using another can be a
hassle.Some users have found that &man.sysinstall.8;'s
Auto-defaults partition sizer will
sometimes select smaller than adequate /var
and / partitions. Partition wisely and
generously.Swap Partitionswap sizingswap partitionAs a rule of thumb, the swap partition should be
about double the size of system memory (RAM). For example,
if the machine has 128 megabytes of memory,
the swap file should be 256 megabytes. Systems with
less memory may perform better with more swap.
Less than 256 megabytes of swap is not recommended and
memory expansion should be considered.
The kernel's VM paging algorithms are tuned to
perform best when the swap partition is at least two times the
size of main memory. Configuring too little swap can lead to
inefficiencies in the VM page scanning code and might create
issues later if more memory is added.On larger systems with multiple SCSI disks (or
multiple IDE disks operating on different controllers), it is
recommend that a swap is configured on each drive (up
to four drives). The swap partitions should be
approximately the same size. The kernel can handle arbitrary
sizes but internal data structures scale to 4 times the
largest swap partition. Keeping the swap partitions near the
same size will allow the kernel to optimally stripe swap space
across disks.
Large swap sizes are fine, even if swap is not
used much. It might be easier to recover
from a runaway program before being forced to reboot.Why Partition?Several users think a single large partition will be fine,
but there are several reasons why this is a bad idea.
First, each partition has different operational
characteristics and separating them allows the file system to
tune accordingly. For example, the root
and /usr partitions are read-mostly, without
much writing. While a lot of reading and writing could
occur in /var and
/var/tmp.By properly partitioning a system, fragmentation
introduced in the smaller write heavy partitions
will not bleed over into the mostly-read partitions.
Keeping the write-loaded partitions closer to
the disk's edge,
will
increase I/O performance in the partitions where it occurs
the most. Now while I/O
performance in the larger partitions may be needed,
shifting them more toward the edge of the disk will not
lead to a significant performance improvement over moving
/var to the edge.
Finally, there are safety concerns. A smaller, neater root
partition which is mostly read-only has a greater
chance of surviving a bad crash.Core Configurationrc filesrc.confThe principal location for system configuration information
is within /etc/rc.conf. This file
contains a wide range of configuration information, principally
used at system startup to configure the system. Its name
directly implies this; it is configuration information for the
rc* files.An administrator should make entries in the
rc.conf file to
override the default settings from
/etc/defaults/rc.conf. The defaults file
should not be copied verbatim to /etc - it
contains default values, not examples. All system-specific
changes should be made in the rc.conf
file itself.A number of strategies may be applied in clustered
applications to separate site-wide configuration from
system-specific configuration in order to keep administration
overhead down. The recommended approach is to place site-wide
configuration into another file,
such as /etc/rc.conf.site, and then include
this file into /etc/rc.conf, which will
contain only system-specific information.As rc.conf is read by &man.sh.1; it is
trivial to achieve this. For example:rc.conf: . rc.conf.site
hostname="node15.example.com"
network_interfaces="fxp0 lo0"
ifconfig_fxp0="inet 10.1.1.1"rc.conf.site: defaultrouter="10.1.1.254"
saver="daemon"
blanktime="100"The rc.conf.site file can then be
distributed to every system using rsync or a
similar program, while the rc.conf file
remains unique.Upgrading the system using &man.sysinstall.8;
or make world will not overwrite the
rc.conf
file, so system configuration information will not be lost.Application ConfigurationTypically, installed applications have their own
configuration files, with their own syntax, etc. It is
important that these files be kept separate from the base
system, so that they may be easily located and managed by the
package management tools./usr/local/etcTypically, these files are installed in
/usr/local/etc. In the case where an
application has a large number of configuration files, a
subdirectory will be created to hold them.Normally, when a port or package is installed, sample
configuration files are also installed. These are usually
identified with a .default suffix. If there
are no existing
configuration files for the application, they will be created by
copying the .default files.For example, consider the contents of the directory
/usr/local/etc/apache:-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 2184 May 20 1998 access.conf
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 2184 May 20 1998 access.conf.default
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 9555 May 20 1998 httpd.conf
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 9555 May 20 1998 httpd.conf.default
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 12205 May 20 1998 magic
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 12205 May 20 1998 magic.default
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 2700 May 20 1998 mime.types
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 2700 May 20 1998 mime.types.default
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 7980 May 20 1998 srm.conf
-rw-r--r-- 1 root wheel 7933 May 20 1998 srm.conf.defaultThe file sizes show that only the srm.conf
file has been changed. A later update of the Apache port would not
overwrite this changed file.TomRhodesContributed by Starting ServicesservicesMany users choose to install third party software on &os;
from the Ports Collection. In many of these situations it
may be necessary to configure the software in a manner which
will allow it to be started upon system initialization. Services,
such as mail/postfix or
www/apache13 are just two
of the many software packages which may be started during system
initialization. This section explains the procedures available
for starting third party software.In &os;, most included services, such as &man.cron.8;, are
started through the system start up scripts. These scripts may
differ depending on &os; or vendor version; however, the most
important aspect to consider is that their start up configuration
can be handled through simple startup scripts.Before the advent of rcNG, applications would drop a
simple start up script into the
/usr/local/etc/rc.d
directory which would be read by the system initialization
scripts. These scripts would then be executed during the latter
stages of system start up.While many individuals have spent hours trying to merge the
old configuration style into the new system, the fact remains
that some third party utilities still require a script simply
dropped into the aforementioned directory. The subtle differences
in the scripts depend whether or not rcNG is being used. Prior
to &os; 5.1 the old configuration style is used and in
almost all cases a new style script would do just fine.While every script must meet some minimal requirements, most
of the time these requirements are &os; version
agnostic. Each script must have a .sh
extension appended to the end and every script must be
executable by the system. The latter may be achieved by using
the chmod command and setting the unique permissions
of 755. There should also be, at minimal,
an option to start the application and an
option to stop the application.The simplest start up script would probably look a little
bit like this one:#!/bin/sh
echo -n ' utility'
case "$1" in
start)
/usr/local/bin/utility
;;
stop)
kill -9 `cat /var/run/utility.pid`
;;
*)
echo "Usage: `basename $0` {start|stop}" >&2
exit 64
;;
esac
exit 0This script provides for a stop and
start option for
the application hereto referred simply as
utility.Could be started manually with:&prompt.root; /usr/local/etc/rc.d/utility.sh startWhile not all third party software requires the line in
rc.conf, almost every day a new port will
be modified to accept this configuration. Check the final output
of the installation for more information on a specific
application. Some third party software will provide start up
scripts which permit the application to be used with
rcNG; although, this will be discussed in the next section.Extended Application ConfigurationNow that &os; includes rcNG, configuration of application
start up has become more optimal; indeed, it has become a bit
more in depth. Using the key words discussed in the
rcNG section,
applications may now be set to start after certain other
services for example DNS; may permit extra
flags to be passed through rc.conf in
place of hard coded flags in the start up script, etc. A
basic script may look similar to the following:#!/bin/sh
#
# PROVIDE: utility
# REQUIRE: DAEMON
# BEFORE: LOGIN
# KEYWORD: FreeBSD shutdown
#
# DO NOT CHANGE THESE DEFAULT VALUES HERE
# SET THEM IN THE /etc/rc.conf FILE
#
utility_enable=${utility_enable-"NO"}
utility_flags=${utility_flags-""}
utility_pidfile=${utility_pidfile-"/var/run/utility.pid"}
. /etc/rc.subr
name="utility"
rcvar=`set_rcvar`
command="/usr/local/sbin/utility"
load_rc_config $name
pidfile="${utility_pidfile}"
start_cmd="echo \"Starting ${name}.\"; /usr/bin/nice -5 ${command} ${utility_flags} ${command_args}"
run_rc_command "$1"This script will ensure that the provided
utility will be started before the
login service but after the
daemon service. It also provides a method
for setting and tracking the PID, or process
ID file.This application could then have the following line placed
in /etc/rc.conf:utility_enable="YES"This new method also allows for easier manipulation of the
command line arguments, inclusion of the default functions
provided in /etc/rc.subr, compatibility
with the &man.rcorder.8; utility and provide for easier
configuration via the rc.conf file. In
essence, this script could even be placed in
/etc/rc.d directory.
Yet, that has the potential to upset the &man.mergemaster.8;
utility when used in conjunction with software upgrades.Using Services to Start ServicesOther services, such as POP3 server
daemons, IMAP, etc. could be started using
the &man.inetd.8;. This involves installing the service
utility from the Ports Collection with a configuration line
appended to the /etc/inetd.conf file,
or uncommenting one of the current configuration lines. Working
with inetd and its configuration is
described in depth in the
inetd section.In some cases, it may be more plausible to use the
&man.cron.8; daemon to start system services. This approach
has a number of advantages because cron runs
these processes as the crontab's file
owner. This allows regular users to start and maintain some
applications.The cron utility provides a unique
feature, @reboot, which may be used in place
of the time specification. This will cause the job to be run
when &man.cron.8; is started, normally during system
initialization.TomRhodesContributed by Configuring the cron UtilitycronconfigurationOne of the most useful utilities in &os; is &man.cron.8;. The
cron utility runs in the background and constantly
checks the /etc/crontab file. The cron
utility also checks the /var/cron/tabs directory, in
search of new crontab files. These
crontab files store information about specific
functions which cron is supposed to perform at
certain times.The cron utility uses two different
types of configuration files, the system crontab and user crontabs. The
only difference between these two formats is the sixth field. In the
system crontab, the sixth field is the name of a user for the command
to run as. This gives the system crontab the ability to run commands
as any user. In a user crontab, the sixth field is the command to run,
and all commands run as the user who created the crontab; this is an
important security feature.User crontabs allow individual users to schedule tasks without the
need for root privileges. Commands in a user's crontab run with the
permissions of the user who owns the crontab.The root user can have a user crontab just like
any other user. This one is different from
/etc/crontab (the system crontab). Because of the
system crontab, there is usually no need to create a user crontab
for root.Let us take a look at the /etc/crontab file
(the system crontab):# /etc/crontab - root's crontab for &os;
#
# $&os;: src/etc/crontab,v 1.32 2002/11/22 16:13:39 tom Exp $
#
#
SHELL=/bin/sh
PATH=/etc:/bin:/sbin:/usr/bin:/usr/sbin
HOME=/var/log
#
#
#minute hour mday month wday who command
#
#
*/5 * * * * root /usr/libexec/atrun Like most &os; configuration files, the #
character represents a comment. A comment can be placed in
the file as a reminder of what and why a desired action is performed.
Comments cannot be on the same line as a command or else they will
be interpreted as part of the command; they must be on a new line.
Blank lines are ignored.First, the environment must be defined. The equals
(=) character is used to define any environment
settings, as with this example where it is used for the SHELL,
PATH, and HOME options. If the shell line is
omitted, cron will use the default, which is
sh. If the PATH variable is
omitted, no default will be used and file locations will need to
be absolute. If HOME is omitted, cron
will use the invoking users home directory.This line defines a total of seven fields. Listed here are the
values minute, hour,
mday, month, wday,
who, and command. These
are almost all self explanatory. minute is the time in minutes the
command will be run. hour is similar to the minute option, just in
hours. mday stands for day of the month. month is similar to hour
and minute, as it designates the month. The wday option stands for
day of the week. All these fields must be numeric values, and follow
the twenty-four hour clock. The who field is special,
and only exists in the /etc/crontab file.
This field specifies which user the command should be run as.
When a user installs his or her crontab file, they
will not have this option. Finally, the command option is listed.
This is the last field, so naturally it should designate the command
to be executed.This last line will define the values discussed above. Notice here
we have a */5 listing, followed by several more
* characters. These * characters
mean first-last, and can be interpreted as
every time. So, judging by this line,
it is apparent that the atrun command is to be invoked by
root every five minutes regardless of what
day or month it is. For more information on the atrun command,
see the &man.atrun.8; manual page.Commands can have any number of flags passed to them; however,
commands which extend to multiple lines need to be broken with the backslash
\ continuation character.This is the basic set up for every
crontab file, although there is one thing
different about this one. Field number six, where we specified
the username, only exists in the system
/etc/crontab file. This field should be
omitted for individual user crontab
files.Installing a CrontabYou must not use the procedure described here to
edit/install the system crontab. Simply use your favorite
editor: the cron utility will notice that the file
has changed and immediately begin using the updated version.
See
this FAQ entry for more information.To install a freshly written user
crontab, first use your favorite editor to create
a file in the proper format, and then use the
crontab utility. The most common usage
is:&prompt.user; crontab crontab-fileIn this example, crontab-file is the filename
of a crontab that was previously created.There is also an option to list installed
crontab files: just pass the
option to crontab and look
over the output.For users who wish to begin their own crontab file from scratch,
without the use of a template, the crontab -e
option is available. This will invoke the selected editor
with an empty file. When the file is saved, it will be
automatically installed by the crontab command.
If you later want to remove your user crontab
completely, use crontab with the
option.
TomRhodesContributed by Using rc under FreeBSD 5.XrcNG&os; has recently integrated the NetBSD
rc.d system for system initialization.
Users should notice the files listed in the
/etc/rc.d directory. Many of these files
are for basic services which can be controlled with the
, ,
and options.
For instance, &man.sshd.8; can be restarted with the following
command:&prompt.root; /etc/rc.d/sshd restartThis procedure is similar for other services. Of course,
services are usually started automatically as specified in
&man.rc.conf.5;. For example, enabling the Network Address
Translation daemon at startup is as simple as adding the
following line to /etc/rc.conf:natd_enable="YES"If a line is already
present, then simply change the to
. The rc scripts will automatically load
any other dependent services during the next reboot, as
described below.Since the rc.d system is primarily
intended to start/stop services at system startup/shutdown time,
the standard ,
and options will only
perform their action if the appropriate
/etc/rc.conf variables are set. For
instance the above sshd restart command will
only work if sshd_enable is set to
in /etc/rc.conf. To
, or
a service regardless of the settings in
/etc/rc.conf, the commands should be
prefixed with force. For instance to restart
sshd regardless of the current
/etc/rc.conf setting, execute the following
command:&prompt.root; /etc/rc.d/sshd forcerestartIt is easy to check if a service is enabled in
/etc/rc.conf by running the appropriate
rc.d script with the option
. Thus, an administrator can check that
sshd is in fact enabled in
/etc/rc.conf by running:&prompt.root; /etc/rc.d/sshd rcvar
# sshd
$sshd_enable=YESThe second line (# sshd) is the output
from the sshd command, not a root
console.To determine if a service is running, a
option is available. For instance to
verify that sshd is actually started:&prompt.root; /etc/rc.d/sshd status
sshd is running as pid 433.It is also possible to a service.
This will attempt to send a signal to an individual service, forcing the
service to reload its configuration files. In most cases this
means sending the service a SIGHUP
signal.The rcNG structure is not only used for network services, it also
contributes to most of the system initialization. For
instance, consider the bgfsck file. When
this script is executed, it will print out the following
message:Starting background file system checks in 60 seconds.Therefore this file is used for background file system
checks, which are done only during system initialization.Many system services depend on other services to function
properly. For example, NIS and other RPC-based services may
fail to start until after the rpcbind
(portmapper) service has started. To resolve this issue,
information about dependencies and other meta-data is included
in the comments at the top of each startup script. The
&man.rcorder.8; program is then used to parse these comments
during system initialization to determine the order in which
system services should be invoked to satisfy the dependencies.
The following words may be included at the top of each startup
file:PROVIDE: Specifies the services this file provides.REQUIRE: Lists services which are required for this
service. This file will run after
the specified services.BEFORE: Lists services which depend on this service.
This file will run before
the specified services.KEYWORD: &os; or NetBSD. This is used for *BSD dependent features.By using this method, an administrator can easily control system
services without the hassle of runlevels like
some other &unix; operating systems.Additional information about the &os; 5.X
rc.d system can be found in the &man.rc.8;
and &man.rc.subr.8; manual pages.MarcFonvieilleContributed by Setting Up Network Interface Cardsnetwork cardsconfigurationNowadays we can not think about a computer without thinking
about a network connection. Adding and configuring a network
card is a common task for any &os; administrator.Locating the Correct Drivernetwork cardsdriverBefore you begin, you should know the model of the card
you have, the chip it uses, and whether it is a PCI or ISA card.
&os; supports a wide variety of both PCI and ISA cards.
Check the Hardware Compatibility List for your release to see
if your card is supported.Once you are sure your card is supported, you need
to determine the proper driver for the card.
/usr/src/sys/conf/NOTES and
/usr/src/sys/arch/conf/NOTES will give you
the list of network interface drivers with some information
about the supported chipsets/cards. If you have doubts about
which driver is the correct one, read the manual page of the
driver. The manual page will give you more information about
the supported hardware and even the possible problems that
could occur.NOTES does not exist on
&os; 4.X. Instead, check the LINT
file for information about various network interfaces. See
for a more detailed
summary of NOTES versus
LINT.If you own a common card, most of the time you will not
have to look very hard for a driver. Drivers for common
network cards are present in the GENERIC
kernel, so your card should show up during boot, like so:dc0: <82c169 PNIC 10/100BaseTX> port 0xa000-0xa0ff mem 0xd3800000-0xd38
000ff irq 15 at device 11.0 on pci0
dc0: Ethernet address: 00:a0:cc:da:da:da
miibus0: <MII bus> on dc0
ukphy0: <Generic IEEE 802.3u media interface> on miibus0
ukphy0: 10baseT, 10baseT-FDX, 100baseTX, 100baseTX-FDX, auto
dc1: <82c169 PNIC 10/100BaseTX> port 0x9800-0x98ff mem 0xd3000000-0xd30
000ff irq 11 at device 12.0 on pci0
dc1: Ethernet address: 00:a0:cc:da:da:db
miibus1: <MII bus> on dc1
ukphy1: <Generic IEEE 802.3u media interface> on miibus1
ukphy1: 10baseT, 10baseT-FDX, 100baseTX, 100baseTX-FDX, autoIn this example, we see that two cards using the &man.dc.4;
driver are present on the system.If the driver for your NIC is not present in
GENERIC, you will need to load the proper
driver to use your NIC. This may be accomplished in one of
two ways:The easiest way is to simply load a kernel module for
your network card with &man.kldload.8;. Not all NIC
drivers are available as modules; notable examples of
devices for which modules do not exist are ISA cards.Alternatively, you may statically compile the support
for your card into your kernel. Check
/usr/src/sys/conf/NOTES,
/usr/src/sys/arch/conf/NOTES
and the manual page of the driver to know what to add in
your kernel configuration file. For more information
about recompiling your kernel, please see . If your card was detected at
boot by your kernel (GENERIC) you do
not have to build a new kernel.Configuring the Network Cardnetwork cardsconfigurationOnce the right driver is loaded for the network card, the
card needs to be configured. As with many other things, the
network card may have been configured at installation time by
sysinstall.To display the configuration for the network interfaces on
your system, enter the following command:&prompt.user; ifconfig
dc0: flags=8843<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST> mtu 1500
inet 192.168.1.3 netmask 0xffffff00 broadcast 192.168.1.255
ether 00:a0:cc:da:da:da
media: Ethernet autoselect (100baseTX <full-duplex>)
status: active
dc1: flags=8843<UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST> mtu 1500
inet 10.0.0.1 netmask 0xffffff00 broadcast 10.0.0.255
ether 00:a0:cc:da:da:db
media: Ethernet 10baseT/UTP
status: no carrier
lp0: flags=8810<POINTOPOINT,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST> mtu 1500
lo0: flags=8049<UP,LOOPBACK,RUNNING,MULTICAST> mtu 16384
inet 127.0.0.1 netmask 0xff000000
tun0: flags=8010<POINTOPOINT,MULTICAST> mtu 1500Old versions of &os; may require the
option following &man.ifconfig.8;, for more details about the
correct syntax of &man.ifconfig.8;, please refer to the manual
page. Note also that entries concerning IPv6
(inet6 etc.) were omitted in this
example.In this example, the following devices were
displayed:dc0: The first Ethernet
interfacedc1: The second Ethernet
interfacelp0: The parallel port
interfacelo0: The loopback devicetun0: The tunnel device used by
ppp&os; uses the driver name followed by the order in
which one the card is detected at the kernel boot to name the
network card. For example sis2 would
be the third network card on the system using the &man.sis.4;
driver.In this example, the dc0 device is
up and running. The key indicators are:UP means that the card is configured
and ready.The card has an Internet (inet)
address (in this case
192.168.1.3).It has a valid subnet mask (netmask;
0xffffff00 is the same as
255.255.255.0).It has a valid broadcast address (in this case,
192.168.1.255).The MAC address of the card (ether)
is 00:a0:cc:da:da:daThe physical media selection is on autoselection mode
(media: Ethernet autoselect (100baseTX
<full-duplex>)). We see that
dc1 was configured to run with
10baseT/UTP media. For more
information on available media types for a driver, please
refer to its manual page.The status of the link (status)
is active, i.e. the carrier is detected.
For dc1, we see
status: no carrier. This is normal when
an Ethernet cable is not plugged into the card.If the &man.ifconfig.8; output had shown something similar
to:dc0: flags=8843<BROADCAST,SIMPLEX,MULTICAST> mtu 1500
ether 00:a0:cc:da:da:dait would indicate the card has not been configured.To configure your card, you need root
privileges. The network card configuration can be done from the
command line with &man.ifconfig.8; but you would have to do it
after each reboot of the system. The file
/etc/rc.conf is where to add the network
card's configuration.Open /etc/rc.conf in your favorite
editor. You need to add a line for each network card present on
the system, for example in our case, we added these lines:ifconfig_dc0="inet 192.168.1.3 netmask 255.255.255.0"
ifconfig_dc1="inet 10.0.0.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 media 10baseT/UTP"You have to replace dc0,
dc1, and so on, with
the correct device for your cards, and the addresses with the
proper ones. You should read the card driver and
&man.ifconfig.8; manual pages for more details about the allowed
options and also &man.rc.conf.5; manual page for more
information on the syntax of
/etc/rc.conf.If you configured the network during installation, some
lines about the network card(s) may be already present. Double
check /etc/rc.conf before adding any
lines.You will also have to edit the file
/etc/hosts to add the names and the IP
addresses of various machines of the LAN, if they are not already
there. For more information please refer to &man.hosts.5;
and to /usr/share/examples/etc/hosts.Testing and TroubleshootingOnce you have made the necessary changes in
/etc/rc.conf, you should reboot your
system. This will allow the change(s) to the interface(s) to
be applied, and verify that the system restarts without any
configuration errors.Once the system has been rebooted, you should test the
network interfaces.Testing the Ethernet Cardnetwork cardstestingTo verify that an Ethernet card is configured correctly,
you have to try two things. First, ping the interface itself,
and then ping another machine on the LAN.First test the local interface:&prompt.user; ping -c5 192.168.1.3
PING 192.168.1.3 (192.168.1.3): 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 192.168.1.3: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.082 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.3: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.074 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.3: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.076 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.3: icmp_seq=3 ttl=64 time=0.108 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.3: icmp_seq=4 ttl=64 time=0.076 ms
--- 192.168.1.3 ping statistics ---
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.074/0.083/0.108/0.013 msNow we have to ping another machine on the LAN:&prompt.user; ping -c5 192.168.1.2
PING 192.168.1.2 (192.168.1.2): 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 192.168.1.2: icmp_seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.726 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.2: icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.766 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.2: icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.700 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.2: icmp_seq=3 ttl=64 time=0.747 ms
64 bytes from 192.168.1.2: icmp_seq=4 ttl=64 time=0.704 ms
--- 192.168.1.2 ping statistics ---
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.700/0.729/0.766/0.025 msYou could also use the machine name instead of
192.168.1.2 if you have set up the
/etc/hosts file.Troubleshootingnetwork cardstroubleshootingTroubleshooting hardware and software configurations is always
a pain, and a pain which can be alleviated by checking the simple
things first. Is your network cable plugged in? Have you properly
configured the network services? Did you configure the firewall
correctly? Is the card you are using supported by &os;? Always
check the hardware notes before sending off a bug report. Update
your version of &os; to the latest STABLE version. Check the
mailing list archives, or perhaps search the Internet.If the card works, yet performance is poor, it would be
worthwhile to read over the &man.tuning.7; manual page. You
can also check the network configuration as incorrect network
settings can cause slow connections.Some users experience one or two device
timeout messages, which is normal for some cards. If they
continue, or are bothersome, you may wish to be sure the
device is not conflicting with another device. Double check
the cable connections. Perhaps you may just need to get
another card.At times, users see a few watchdog timeout
errors. The first thing to do here is to check your network
cable. Many cards require a PCI slot which supports Bus
Mastering. On some old motherboards, only one PCI slot allows
it (usually slot 0). Check the network card and the
motherboard documentation to determine if that may be the
problem.No route to host messages occur if the
system is unable to route a packet to the destination host.
This can happen if no default route is specified, or if a
cable is unplugged. Check the output of netstat
-rn and make sure there is a valid route to the host
you are trying to reach. If there is not, read on to .ping: sendto: Permission denied error
messages are often caused by a misconfigured firewall. If
ipfw is enabled in the kernel but no rules
have been defined, then the default policy is to deny all
traffic, even ping requests! Read on to for more information.Sometimes performance of the card is poor, or below average.
In these cases it is best to set the media selection mode
from autoselect to the correct media selection.
While this usually works for most hardware, it may not resolve
this issue for everyone. Again, check all the network settings,
and read over the &man.tuning.7; manual page.Virtual Hostsvirtual hostsIP aliasesA very common use of &os; is virtual site hosting, where
one server appears to the network as many servers. This is
achieved by assigning multiple network addresses to a single
interface.A given network interface has one real address,
and may have any number of alias addresses.
These aliases are
normally added by placing alias entries in
/etc/rc.conf.An alias entry for the interface fxp0
looks like:ifconfig_fxp0_alias0="inet xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"Note that alias entries must start with alias0 and proceed
upwards in order, (for example, _alias1, _alias2, and so on).
The configuration process will stop at the first missing number.
The calculation of alias netmasks is important, but
fortunately quite simple. For a given interface, there must be
one address which correctly represents the network's netmask.
Any other addresses which fall within this network must have a
netmask of all 1s (expressed as either
255.255.255.255 or 0xffffffff).
For example, consider the case where the
fxp0 interface is
connected to two networks, the 10.1.1.0
network with a netmask of 255.255.255.0
and the 202.0.75.16 network with
a netmask of 255.255.255.240.
We want the system to appear at 10.1.1.1
through 10.1.1.5 and at
202.0.75.17 through
202.0.75.20. As noted above, only the
first address in a given network range (in this case,
10.0.1.1 and
202.0.75.17) should have a real
netmask; all the rest (10.1.1.2
through 10.1.1.5 and
202.0.75.18 through
202.0.75.20) must be configured with a
netmask of 255.255.255.255.The following entries configure the adapter correctly for
this arrangement: ifconfig_fxp0="inet 10.1.1.1 netmask 255.255.255.0"
ifconfig_fxp0_alias0="inet 10.1.1.2 netmask 255.255.255.255"
ifconfig_fxp0_alias1="inet 10.1.1.3 netmask 255.255.255.255"
ifconfig_fxp0_alias2="inet 10.1.1.4 netmask 255.255.255.255"
ifconfig_fxp0_alias3="inet 10.1.1.5 netmask 255.255.255.255"
ifconfig_fxp0_alias4="inet 202.0.75.17 netmask 255.255.255.240"
ifconfig_fxp0_alias5="inet 202.0.75.18 netmask 255.255.255.255"
ifconfig_fxp0_alias6="inet 202.0.75.19 netmask 255.255.255.255"
ifconfig_fxp0_alias7="inet 202.0.75.20 netmask 255.255.255.255"Configuration Files/etc LayoutThere are a number of directories in which configuration
information is kept. These include:/etcGeneric system configuration information; data here is
system-specific./etc/defaultsDefault versions of system configuration files./etc/mailExtra &man.sendmail.8; configuration, other
MTA configuration files.
/etc/pppConfiguration for both user- and kernel-ppp programs.
/etc/namedbDefault location for &man.named.8; data. Normally
named.conf and zone files are stored
here./usr/local/etcConfiguration files for installed applications.
May contain per-application subdirectories./usr/local/etc/rc.dStart/stop scripts for installed applications./var/dbAutomatically generated system-specific database files,
such as the package database, the locate database, and so
onHostnameshostnameDNS/etc/resolv.confresolv.conf/etc/resolv.conf dictates how &os;'s
resolver accesses the Internet Domain Name System (DNS).The most common entries to resolv.conf are:
nameserverThe IP address of a name server the resolver
should query. The servers are queried in the order
listed with a maximum of three.searchSearch list for hostname lookup. This is normally
determined by the domain of the local hostname.domainThe local domain name.A typical resolv.conf:search example.com
nameserver 147.11.1.11
nameserver 147.11.100.30Only one of the search and
domain options should be used.If you are using DHCP, &man.dhclient.8; usually rewrites
resolv.conf with information received from the
DHCP server./etc/hostshosts/etc/hosts is a simple text
database reminiscent of the old Internet. It works in
conjunction with DNS and NIS providing name to IP address
mappings. Local computers connected via a LAN can be placed
in here for simplistic naming purposes instead of setting up
a &man.named.8; server. Additionally,
/etc/hosts can be used to provide a
local record of Internet names, reducing the need to query
externally for commonly accessed names.# $&os;$
#
# Host Database
# This file should contain the addresses and aliases
# for local hosts that share this file.
# In the presence of the domain name service or NIS, this file may
# not be consulted at all; see /etc/nsswitch.conf for the resolution order.
#
#
::1 localhost localhost.my.domain myname.my.domain
127.0.0.1 localhost localhost.my.domain myname.my.domain
#
# Imaginary network.
#10.0.0.2 myname.my.domain myname
#10.0.0.3 myfriend.my.domain myfriend
#
# According to RFC 1918, you can use the following IP networks for
# private nets which will never be connected to the Internet:
#
# 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255
# 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255
# 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255
#
# In case you want to be able to connect to the Internet, you need
# real official assigned numbers. PLEASE PLEASE PLEASE do not try
# to invent your own network numbers but instead get one from your
# network provider (if any) or from the Internet Registry (ftp to
# rs.internic.net, directory `/templates').
#/etc/hosts takes on the simple format
of:[Internet address] [official hostname] [alias1] [alias2] ...For example:10.0.0.1 myRealHostname.example.com myRealHostname foobar1 foobar2Consult &man.hosts.5; for more information.Log File Configurationlog filessyslog.confsyslog.confsyslog.conf is the configuration file
for the &man.syslogd.8; program. It indicates which types
of syslog messages are logged to particular
log files.# $&os;$
#
# Spaces ARE valid field separators in this file. However,
# other *nix-like systems still insist on using tabs as field
# separators. If you are sharing this file between systems, you
# may want to use only tabs as field separators here.
# Consult the syslog.conf(5) manual page.
*.err;kern.debug;auth.notice;mail.crit /dev/console
*.notice;kern.debug;lpr.info;mail.crit;news.err /var/log/messages
security.* /var/log/security
mail.info /var/log/maillog
lpr.info /var/log/lpd-errs
cron.* /var/log/cron
*.err root
*.notice;news.err root
*.alert root
*.emerg *
# uncomment this to log all writes to /dev/console to /var/log/console.log
#console.info /var/log/console.log
# uncomment this to enable logging of all log messages to /var/log/all.log
#*.* /var/log/all.log
# uncomment this to enable logging to a remote log host named loghost
#*.* @loghost
# uncomment these if you're running inn
# news.crit /var/log/news/news.crit
# news.err /var/log/news/news.err
# news.notice /var/log/news/news.notice
!startslip
*.* /var/log/slip.log
!ppp
*.* /var/log/ppp.logConsult the &man.syslog.conf.5; manual page for more
information.newsyslog.confnewsyslog.confnewsyslog.conf is the configuration
file for &man.newsyslog.8;, a program that is normally scheduled
to run by &man.cron.8;. &man.newsyslog.8; determines when log
files require archiving or rearranging.
logfile is moved to
logfile.0, logfile.0
is moved to logfile.1, and so on.
Alternatively, the log files may be archived in &man.gzip.1; format
causing them to be named: logfile.0.gz,
logfile.1.gz, and so on.newsyslog.conf indicates which log
files are to be managed, how many are to be kept, and when
they are to be touched. Log files can be rearranged and/or
archived when they have either reached a certain size, or at a
certain periodic time/date.# configuration file for newsyslog
# $&os;$
#
# filename [owner:group] mode count size when [ZB] [/pid_file] [sig_num]
/var/log/cron 600 3 100 * Z
/var/log/amd.log 644 7 100 * Z
/var/log/kerberos.log 644 7 100 * Z
/var/log/lpd-errs 644 7 100 * Z
/var/log/maillog 644 7 * @T00 Z
/var/log/sendmail.st 644 10 * 168 B
/var/log/messages 644 5 100 * Z
/var/log/all.log 600 7 * @T00 Z
/var/log/slip.log 600 3 100 * Z
/var/log/ppp.log 600 3 100 * Z
/var/log/security 600 10 100 * Z
/var/log/wtmp 644 3 * @01T05 B
/var/log/daily.log 640 7 * @T00 Z
/var/log/weekly.log 640 5 1 $W6D0 Z
/var/log/monthly.log 640 12 * $M1D0 Z
/var/log/console.log 640 5 100 * ZConsult the &man.newsyslog.8; manual page for more
information.sysctl.confsysctl.confsysctlsysctl.conf looks much like
rc.conf. Values are set in a
variable=value
form. The specified values are set after the system goes into
multi-user mode. Not all variables are settable in this mode.A sample sysctl.conf turning off logging
of fatal signal exits and letting Linux programs know they are really
running under &os;:kern.logsigexit=0 # Do not log fatal signal exits (e.g. sig 11)
compat.linux.osname=&os;
compat.linux.osrelease=4.3-STABLETuning with sysctlsysctltuningwith sysctl&man.sysctl.8; is an interface that allows you to make changes
to a running &os; system. This includes many advanced
options of the TCP/IP stack and virtual memory system that can
dramatically improve performance for an experienced system
administrator. Over five hundred system variables can be read
and set using &man.sysctl.8;.At its core, &man.sysctl.8; serves two functions: to read and
to modify system settings.To view all readable variables:&prompt.user; sysctl -aTo read a particular variable, for example,
kern.maxproc:&prompt.user; sysctl kern.maxproc
kern.maxproc: 1044To set a particular variable, use the intuitive
variable=value
syntax:&prompt.root; sysctl kern.maxfiles=5000
kern.maxfiles: 2088 -> 5000Settings of sysctl variables are usually either strings,
numbers, or booleans (a boolean being 1 for yes
or a 0 for no).If you want to set automatically some variables each time
the machine boots, add them to the
/etc/sysctl.conf file. For more information
see the &man.sysctl.conf.5; manual page and the
.TomRhodesContributed by &man.sysctl.8; Read-onlyIn some cases it may be desirable to modify read-only &man.sysctl.8;
values. While this is not recommended, it is also sometimes unavoidable.For instance on some laptop models the &man.cardbus.4; device will
not probe memory ranges, and fail with errors which look similar to:cbb0: Could not map register memory
device_probe_and_attach: cbb0 attach returned 12Cases like the one above usually require the modification of some
default &man.sysctl.8; settings which are set read only. To overcome
these situations a user can put &man.sysctl.8; OIDs
in their local /boot/loader.conf. Default
settings are located in the /boot/defaults/loader.conf
file.Fixing the problem mentioned above would require a user to set
in the aforementioned
file. Now &man.cardbus.4; will work properly.Tuning DisksSysctl Variablesvfs.vmiodirenablevfs.vmiodirenableThe vfs.vmiodirenable sysctl variable
may be set to either 0 (off) or 1 (on); it is 1 by default.
This variable controls how directories are cached by the
system. Most directories are small, using just a single
fragment (typically 1 K) in the file system and less
(typically 512 bytes) in the buffer cache.
With this variable turned off (to 0), the buffer
cache will only cache a fixed number of directories even if
you have a huge amount of memory. When turned on (to 1), this sysctl
allows the buffer cache to use the VM Page Cache to cache the
directories, making all the memory available for caching
directories. However,
the minimum in-core memory used to cache a directory is the
physical page size (typically 4 K) rather than 512
bytes. We recommend keeping this option on if you are running
any services which manipulate large numbers of files. Such
services can include web caches, large mail systems, and news
systems. Keeping this option on will generally not reduce
performance even with the wasted memory but you should
experiment to find out.vfs.write_behindvfs.write_behindThe vfs.write_behind sysctl variable
defaults to 1 (on). This tells the file system
to issue media writes as full clusters are collected, which
typically occurs when writing large sequential files. The idea
is to avoid saturating the buffer cache with dirty buffers when
it would not benefit I/O performance. However, this may stall
processes and under certain circumstances you may wish to turn it
off.vfs.hirunningspacevfs.hirunningspaceThe vfs.hirunningspace sysctl variable
determines how much outstanding write I/O may be queued to disk
controllers system-wide at any given instance. The default is
usually sufficient but on machines with lots of disks you may
want to bump it up to four or five megabytes.
Note that setting too high a value (exceeding the buffer cache's
write threshold) can lead to extremely bad clustering
performance. Do not set this value arbitrarily high! Higher
write values may add latency to reads occurring at the same time.
There are various other buffer-cache and VM page cache
related sysctls. We do not recommend modifying these values. As
of &os; 4.3, the VM system does an extremely good job of
automatically tuning itself.vm.swap_idle_enabledvm.swap_idle_enabledThe vm.swap_idle_enabled sysctl variable
is useful in large multi-user systems where you have lots of
users entering and leaving the system and lots of idle processes.
Such systems tend to generate a great deal of continuous pressure
on free memory reserves. Turning this feature on and tweaking
the swapout hysteresis (in idle seconds) via
vm.swap_idle_threshold1 and
vm.swap_idle_threshold2 allows you to depress
the priority of memory pages associated with idle processes more
quickly then the normal pageout algorithm. This gives a helping
hand to the pageout daemon. Do not turn this option on unless
you need it, because the tradeoff you are making is essentially
pre-page memory sooner rather than later; thus eating more swap
and disk bandwidth. In a small system this option will have a
determinable effect but in a large system that is already doing
moderate paging this option allows the VM system to stage whole
processes into and out of memory easily.hw.ata.wchw.ata.wc&os; 4.3 flirted with turning off IDE write caching.
This reduced write bandwidth to IDE disks but was considered
necessary due to serious data consistency issues introduced
by hard drive vendors. The problem is that IDE
drives lie about when a write completes. With IDE write
caching turned on, IDE hard drives not only write data
to disk out of order, but will sometimes delay writing some
blocks indefinitely when under heavy disk loads. A crash or
power failure may cause serious file system corruption.
&os;'s default was changed to be safe. Unfortunately, the
result was such a huge performance loss that we changed
write caching back to on by default after the release. You
should check the default on your system by observing the
hw.ata.wc sysctl variable. If IDE write
caching is turned off, you can turn it back on by setting
the kernel variable back to 1. This must be done from the
boot loader at boot time. Attempting to do it after the
kernel boots will have no effect.For more information, please see &man.ata.4;.SCSI_DELAY
(kern.cam.scsi_delay)kern.cam.scsi_delaykernel optionsSCSI_DELAYThe SCSI_DELAY kernel config may be used to
reduce system boot times. The defaults are fairly high and can be
responsible for 15 seconds of delay in the
boot process. Reducing it to 5 seconds usually
works (especially with modern drives). Newer versions of &os;
(5.0 and higher) should use the kern.cam.scsi_delay
boot time tunable. The tunable, and kernel config option accept
values in terms of milliseconds and
notseconds.Soft UpdatesSoft UpdatestunefsThe &man.tunefs.8; program can be used to fine-tune a
file system. This program has many different options, but for
now we are only concerned with toggling Soft Updates on and
off, which is done by:&prompt.root; tunefs -n enable /filesystem
&prompt.root; tunefs -n disable /filesystemA filesystem cannot be modified with &man.tunefs.8; while
it is mounted. A good time to enable Soft Updates is before any
partitions have been mounted, in single-user mode.As of &os; 4.5, it is possible to enable Soft Updates
at filesystem creation time, through use of the -U
option to &man.newfs.8;.Soft Updates drastically improves meta-data performance, mainly
file creation and deletion, through the use of a memory cache. We
recommend to use Soft Updates on all of your file systems. There
are two downsides to Soft Updates that you should be aware of: First,
Soft Updates guarantees filesystem consistency in the case of a crash
but could very easily be several seconds (even a minute!) behind
updating the physical disk. If your system crashes you may lose more
work than otherwise. Secondly, Soft Updates delays the freeing of
filesystem blocks. If you have a filesystem (such as the root
filesystem) which is almost full, performing a major update, such as
make installworld, can cause the filesystem to run
out of space and the update to fail.More Details about Soft UpdatesSoft UpdatesdetailsThere are two traditional approaches to writing a file
systems meta-data back to disk. (Meta-data updates are
updates to non-content data like inodes or
directories.)Historically, the default behavior was to write out
meta-data updates synchronously. If a directory had been
changed, the system waited until the change was actually
written to disk. The file data buffers (file contents) were
passed through the buffer cache and backed up
to disk later on asynchronously. The advantage of this
implementation is that it operates safely. If there is
a failure during an update, the meta-data are always in a
consistent state. A file is either created completely
or not at all. If the data blocks of a file did not find
their way out of the buffer cache onto the disk by the time
of the crash, &man.fsck.8; is able to recognize this and
repair the filesystem by setting the file length to
0. Additionally, the implementation is clear and simple.
The disadvantage is that meta-data changes are slow. An
rm -r, for instance, touches all the files
in a directory sequentially, but each directory
change (deletion of a file) will be written synchronously
to the disk. This includes updates to the directory itself,
to the inode table, and possibly to indirect blocks
allocated by the file. Similar considerations apply for
unrolling large hierarchies (tar -x).The second case is asynchronous meta-data updates. This
is the default for Linux/ext2fs and
mount -o async for *BSD ufs. All
meta-data updates are simply being passed through the buffer
cache too, that is, they will be intermixed with the updates
of the file content data. The advantage of this
implementation is there is no need to wait until each
meta-data update has been written to disk, so all operations
which cause huge amounts of meta-data updates work much
faster than in the synchronous case. Also, the
implementation is still clear and simple, so there is a low
risk for bugs creeping into the code. The disadvantage is
that there is no guarantee at all for a consistent state of
the filesystem. If there is a failure during an operation
that updated large amounts of meta-data (like a power
failure, or someone pressing the reset button),
the filesystem
will be left in an unpredictable state. There is no opportunity
to examine the state of the filesystem when the system
comes up again; the data blocks of a file could already have
been written to the disk while the updates of the inode
table or the associated directory were not. It is actually
impossible to implement a fsck which is
able to clean up the resulting chaos (because the necessary
information is not available on the disk). If the
filesystem has been damaged beyond repair, the only choice
is to use &man.newfs.8; on it and restore it from backup.
The usual solution for this problem was to implement
dirty region logging, which is also
referred to as journaling, although that
term is not used consistently and is occasionally applied
to other forms of transaction logging as well. Meta-data
updates are still written synchronously, but only into a
small region of the disk. Later on they will be moved
to their proper location. Because the logging
area is a small, contiguous region on the disk, there
are no long distances for the disk heads to move, even
during heavy operations, so these operations are quicker
than synchronous updates.
Additionally the complexity of the implementation is fairly
limited, so the risk of bugs being present is low. A disadvantage
is that all meta-data are written twice (once into the
logging region and once to the proper location) so for
normal work, a performance pessimization
might result. On the other hand, in case of a crash, all
pending meta-data operations can be quickly either rolled-back
or completed from the logging area after the system comes
up again, resulting in a fast filesystem startup.Kirk McKusick, the developer of Berkeley FFS,
solved this problem with Soft Updates: all pending
meta-data updates are kept in memory and written out to disk
in a sorted sequence (ordered meta-data
updates). This has the effect that, in case of
heavy meta-data operations, later updates to an item
catch the earlier ones if the earlier ones are still in
memory and have not already been written to disk. So all
operations on, say, a directory are generally performed in
memory before the update is written to disk (the data
blocks are sorted according to their position so
that they will not be on the disk ahead of their meta-data).
If the system crashes, this causes an implicit log
rewind: all operations which did not find their way
to the disk appear as if they had never happened. A
consistent filesystem state is maintained that appears to
be the one of 30 to 60 seconds earlier. The
algorithm used guarantees that all resources in use
are marked as such in their appropriate bitmaps: blocks and inodes.
After a crash, the only resource allocation error
that occurs is that resources are
marked as used which are actually free.
&man.fsck.8; recognizes this situation,
and frees the resources that are no longer used. It is safe to
ignore the dirty state of the filesystem after a crash by
forcibly mounting it with mount -f. In
order to free resources that may be unused, &man.fsck.8;
needs to be run at a later time. This is the idea behind
the background fsck: at system startup
time, only a snapshot of the
filesystem is recorded. The fsck can be
run later on. All file systems can then be mounted
dirty, so the system startup proceeds in
multiuser mode. Then, background fscks
will be scheduled for all file systems where this is required, to free
resources that may be unused. (File systems that do not use
Soft Updates still need the usual foreground
fsck though.)The advantage is that meta-data operations are nearly as
fast as asynchronous updates (i.e. faster than with
logging, which has to write the
meta-data twice). The disadvantages are the complexity of
the code (implying a higher risk for bugs in an area that
is highly sensitive regarding loss of user data), and a
higher memory consumption. Additionally there are some
idiosyncrasies one has to get used to.
After a crash, the state of the filesystem appears to be
somewhat older. In situations where
the standard synchronous approach would have caused some
zero-length files to remain after the
fsck, these files do not exist at all
with a Soft Updates filesystem because neither the meta-data
nor the file contents have ever been written to disk.
Disk space is not released until the updates have been
written to disk, which may take place some time after
running rm. This may cause problems
when installing large amounts of data on a filesystem
that does not have enough free space to hold all the files
twice.Tuning Kernel Limitstuningkernel limitsFile/Process Limitskern.maxfileskern.maxfileskern.maxfiles can be raised or
lowered based upon your system requirements. This variable
indicates the maximum number of file descriptors on your
system. When the file descriptor table is full,
file: table is full will show up repeatedly
in the system message buffer, which can be viewed with the
dmesg command.Each open file, socket, or fifo uses one file
descriptor. A large-scale production server may easily
require many thousands of file descriptors, depending on the
kind and number of services running concurrently.kern.maxfile's default value is
dictated by the option in your
kernel configuration file. kern.maxfiles grows
proportionally to the value of . When
compiling a custom kernel, it is a good idea to set this kernel
configuration option according to the uses of your system. From
this number, the kernel is given most of its pre-defined limits.
Even though a production machine may not actually have 256 users
connected at once, the resources needed may be similar to a
high-scale web server.As of &os; 4.5, setting to
0 in your kernel configuration file will choose
a reasonable default value based on the amount of RAM present in
your system.kern.ipc.somaxconnkern.ipc.somaxconnThe kern.ipc.somaxconn sysctl variable
limits the size of the listen queue for accepting new TCP
connections. The default value of 128 is
typically too low for robust handling of new connections in a
heavily loaded web server environment. For such environments, it
is recommended to increase this value to 1024 or
higher. The service daemon may itself limit the listen queue size
(e.g. &man.sendmail.8;, or Apache) but
will often have a directive in its configuration file to adjust
the queue size. Large listen queues also do a better job of
avoiding Denial of Service (DoS) attacks.Network LimitsThe NMBCLUSTERS kernel configuration
option dictates the amount of network Mbufs available to the
system. A heavily-trafficked server with a low number of Mbufs
will hinder &os;'s ability. Each cluster represents
approximately 2 K of memory, so a value of 1024 represents 2
megabytes of kernel memory reserved for network buffers. A
simple calculation can be done to figure out how many are
needed. If you have a web server which maxes out at 1000
simultaneous connections, and each connection eats a 16 K receive
and 16 K send buffer, you need approximately 32 MB worth of
network buffers to cover the web server. A good rule of thumb is
to multiply by 2, so 2x32 MB / 2 KB =
64 MB / 2 kB = 32768. We recommend
values between 4096 and 32768 for machines with greater amounts
of memory. Under no circumstances should you specify an
arbitrarily high value for this parameter as it could lead to a
boot time crash. The option to
&man.netstat.1; may be used to observe network cluster
use.kern.ipc.nmbclusters loader tunable should
be used to tune this at boot time. Only older versions of &os;
will require you to use the NMBCLUSTERS kernel
&man.config.8; option.For busy servers that make extensive use of the
&man.sendfile.2; system call, it may be necessary to increase
the number of &man.sendfile.2; buffers via the
NSFBUFS kernel configuration option or by
setting its value in /boot/loader.conf
(see &man.loader.8; for details). A common indicator that
this parameter needs to be adjusted is when processes are seen
in the sfbufa state. The sysctl
variable kern.ipc.nsfbufs is a read-only
glimpse at the kernel configured variable. This parameter
nominally scales with kern.maxusers,
however it may be necessary to tune accordingly.Even though a socket has been marked as non-blocking,
calling &man.sendfile.2; on the non-blocking socket may
result in the &man.sendfile.2; call blocking until enough
struct sf_buf's are made
available.net.inet.ip.portrange.*net.inet.ip.portrange.*The net.inet.ip.portrange.* sysctl
variables control the port number ranges automatically bound to TCP
and UDP sockets. There are three ranges: a low range, a default
range, and a high range. Most network programs use the default
range which is controlled by the
net.inet.ip.portrange.first and
net.inet.ip.portrange.last, which default to
1024 and 5000, respectively. Bound port ranges are used for
outgoing connections, and it is possible to run the system out of
ports under certain circumstances. This most commonly occurs
when you are running a heavily loaded web proxy. The port range
is not an issue when running servers which handle mainly incoming
connections, such as a normal web server, or has a limited number
of outgoing connections, such as a mail relay. For situations
where you may run yourself out of ports, it is recommended to
increase net.inet.ip.portrange.last modestly.
A value of 10000, 20000 or
30000 may be reasonable. You should also
consider firewall effects when changing the port range. Some
firewalls may block large ranges of ports (usually low-numbered
ports) and expect systems to use higher ranges of ports for
outgoing connections — for this reason it is recommended that
net.inet.ip.portrange.first be lowered.TCP Bandwidth Delay ProductTCP Bandwidth Delay Product Limitingnet.inet.tcp.inflight.enableThe TCP Bandwidth Delay Product Limiting is similar to
TCP/Vegas in NetBSD. It can be
enabled by setting net.inet.tcp.inflight.enable
sysctl variable to 1. The system will attempt
to calculate the bandwidth delay product for each connection and
limit the amount of data queued to the network to just the amount
required to maintain optimum throughput.This feature is useful if you are serving data over modems,
Gigabit Ethernet, or even high speed WAN links (or any other link
with a high bandwidth delay product), especially if you are also
using window scaling or have configured a large send window. If
you enable this option, you should also be sure to set
net.inet.tcp.inflight.debug to
0 (disable debugging), and for production use
setting net.inet.tcp.inflight.min to at least
6144 may be beneficial. However, note that
setting high minimums may effectively disable bandwidth limiting
depending on the link. The limiting feature reduces the amount of
data built up in intermediate route and switch packet queues as
well as reduces the amount of data built up in the local host's
interface queue. With fewer packets queued up, interactive
connections, especially over slow modems, will also be able to
operate with lower Round Trip Times. However,
note that this feature only effects data transmission (uploading
/ server side). It has no effect on data reception (downloading).
Adjusting net.inet.tcp.inflight.stab is
not recommended. This parameter defaults to
20, representing 2 maximal packets added to the bandwidth delay
product window calculation. The additional window is required to
stabilize the algorithm and improve responsiveness to changing
conditions, but it can also result in higher ping times over slow
links (though still much lower than you would get without the
inflight algorithm). In such cases, you may wish to try reducing
this parameter to 15, 10, or 5; and may also have to reduce
net.inet.tcp.inflight.min (for example, to
3500) to get the desired effect. Reducing these parameters
should be done as a last resort only.In 4.X and earlier releases of &os; the
inflight sysctl variables are directly under
net.inet.tcp. Their names were
(in alphabetic order):
net.inet.tcp.inflight_debug,
net.inet.tcp.inflight_enable,
net.inet.tcp.inflight_max,
net.inet.tcp.inflight_min,
net.inet.tcp.inflight_stab.Adding Swap SpaceNo matter how well you plan, sometimes a system does not run
as you expect. If you find you need more swap space, it is
simple enough to add. You have three ways to increase swap
space: adding a new hard drive, enabling swap over NFS, and
creating a swap file on an existing partition.Swap on a New Hard DriveThe best way to add swap, of course, is to use this as an
excuse to add another hard drive. You can always use another
hard drive, after all. If you can do this, go reread the
discussion of swap space
in
of the Handbook for some suggestions on how to best
arrange your swap.Swapping over NFSSwapping over NFS is only recommended if you do not have a
local hard disk to swap to. Swapping over NFS is slow and
inefficient in versions of &os; prior to 4.X. It is
reasonably fast and efficient in 4.0-RELEASE and newer. Even
with newer versions of &os;, NFS swapping will be limited
by the available network bandwidth and puts an additional
burden on the NFS server.SwapfilesYou can create a file of a specified size to use as a swap
file. In our example here we will use a 64MB file called
/usr/swap0. You can use any name you
want, of course.Creating a Swapfile on &os; 4.XBe certain that your kernel configuration includes
the vnode driver. It is not in recent versions of
GENERIC.pseudo-device vn 1 #Vnode driver (turns a file into a device)Create a vn-device:&prompt.root; cd /dev
&prompt.root; sh MAKEDEV vn0Create a swapfile (/usr/swap0):&prompt.root; dd if=/dev/zero of=/usr/swap0 bs=1024k count=64Set proper permissions on (/usr/swap0):&prompt.root; chmod 0600 /usr/swap0Enable the swap file in /etc/rc.conf:swapfile="/usr/swap0" # Set to name of swapfile if aux swapfile desired.Reboot the machine or to enable the swap file immediately,
type:&prompt.root; vnconfig -e /dev/vn0b /usr/swap0 swapCreating a Swapfile on &os; 5.XBe certain that your kernel configuration includes
the memory disk driver (&man.md.4;). It is default in
GENERIC kernel.device md # Memory "disks"Create a swapfile (/usr/swap0):&prompt.root; dd if=/dev/zero of=/usr/swap0 bs=1024k count=64Set proper permissions on (/usr/swap0):&prompt.root; chmod 0600 /usr/swap0Enable the swap file in /etc/rc.conf:swapfile="/usr/swap0" # Set to name of swapfile if aux swapfile desired.Reboot the machine or to enable the swap file immediately,
type:&prompt.root; mdconfig -a -t vnode -f /usr/swap0 -u 0 && swapon /dev/md0HitenPandyaWritten by TomRhodesPower and Resource ManagementIt is very important to utilize hardware resources in an
efficient manner. Before ACPI was introduced,
it was very difficult and inflexible for operating systems to manage
the power usage and thermal properties of a system. The hardware was
controlled by some sort of BIOS embedded
interface, such as Plug and Play BIOS (PNPBIOS), or
Advanced Power Management (APM) and so on.
Power and Resource Management is one of the key components of a modern
operating system. For example, you may want an operating system to
monitor system limits (and possibly alert you) in case your system
temperature increased unexpectedly.In this section of the &os; Handbook, we will provide
comprehensive information about ACPI. References
will be provided for further reading at the end. Please be aware
that ACPI is available on &os; 5.X and
above systems as a default kernel module. For &os; 4.9,
ACPI can be enabled by adding the line
device acpica to a kernel configuration and
rebuilding.What Is ACPI?ACPIAPMAdvanced Configuration and Power Interface
(ACPI) is a standard written by
an alliance of vendors to provide a standard interface for
hardware resources and power management (hence the name).
It is a key element in Operating System-directed
configuration and Power Management, i.e.: it provides
more control and flexibility to the operating system
(OS).
Modern systems stretched the limits of the
current Plug and Play interfaces (such as APM, which is used in
&os; 4.X), prior to the introduction of
ACPI. ACPI is the direct
successor to APM
(Advanced Power Management).Shortcomings of Advanced Power Management (APM)The Advanced Power Management (APM)
facility controls the power usage of a system based on its
activity. The APM BIOS is supplied by the (system) vendor and
it is specific to the hardware platform. An APM driver in the
OS mediates access to the APM Software Interface,
which allows management of power levels.There are four major problems in APM. Firstly, power
management is done by the (vendor-specific) BIOS, and the OS
does not have any knowledge of it. One example of this, is when
the user sets idle-time values for a hard drive in the APM BIOS,
that when exceeded, it (BIOS) would spin down the hard drive,
without the consent of the OS. Secondly, the APM logic is
embedded in the BIOS, and it operates outside the scope of the
OS. This means users can only fix problems in their APM BIOS by
flashing a new one into the ROM; which is a very dangerous
procedure with the potential to leave the system in an
unrecoverable state if it fails. Thirdly, APM is a vendor-specific
technology, which means that there is a lot of parity
(duplication of efforts) and bugs found in one vendor's BIOS,
may not be solved in others. Last but not the least, the APM
BIOS did not have enough room to implement a sophisticated power
policy, or one that can adapt very well to the purpose of the
machine.Plug and Play BIOS (PNPBIOS) was
unreliable in many situations. PNPBIOS is 16-bit technology,
so the OS has to use 16-bit emulation in order to
interface with PNPBIOS methods.The &os; APM driver is documented in
the &man.apm.4; manual page.Configuring ACPIThe acpi.ko driver is loaded by default
at start up by the &man.loader.8; and should not
be compiled into the kernel. The reasoning behind this is that modules
are easier to work with, say if switching to another acpi.ko
without doing a kernel rebuild. This has the advantage of making testing easier.
Another reason is that starting ACPI after a system has been
brought up is not too useful, and in some cases can be fatal. In doubt, just
disable ACPI all together. This driver should not and can not
be unloaded because the system bus uses it for various hardware interactions.
ACPI can be disabled with the &man.acpiconf.8; utility.
In fact most of the interaction with ACPI can be done via
&man.acpiconf.8;. Basically this means, if anything about ACPI
is in the &man.dmesg.8; output, then most likely it is already running.ACPI and APM cannot coexist and
should be used separately. The last one to load will terminate if the driver
notices the other running.In the simplest form, ACPI can be used to put the
system into a sleep mode with &man.acpiconf.8;, the
flag, and a 1-5 option. Most users will only need
1. Option 5 will do a soft-off
which is the same action as:&prompt.root; halt -pThe other options are available. Check out the &man.acpiconf.8;
manual page for more information.NateLawsonWritten by PeterSchultzWith contributions from TomRhodesUsing and Debugging &os; ACPIACPIproblemsACPI is a fundamentally new way of
discovering devices, managing power usage, and providing
standardized access to various hardware previously managed
by the BIOS. Progress is being made toward
ACPI working on all systems, but bugs in some
motherboards' ACPI Machine
Language (AML) bytecode,
incompleteness in &os;'s kernel subsystems, and bugs in the &intel;
ACPI-CA interpreter continue to appear.This document is intended to help you assist the &os;
ACPI maintainers in identifying the root cause
of problems you observe and debugging and developing a solution.
Thanks for reading this and we hope we can solve your system's
problems.Submitting Debugging InformationBefore submitting a problem, be sure you are running the latest
BIOS version and, if available, embedded
controller firmware version.For those of you that want to submit a problem right away,
please send the following information to
freebsd-acpi@FreeBSD.org:Description of the buggy behavior, including system type
and model and anything that causes the bug to appear. Also,
please note as accurately as possible when the bug began
occurring if it is new for you.The &man.dmesg.8; output after boot
-v, including any error messages
generated by you exercising the bug.The &man.dmesg.8; output from boot
-v with ACPI
disabled, if disabling it helps fix the problem.Output from sysctl hw.acpi. This is also
a good way of figuring out what features your system
offers.URL where your
ACPI Source Language
(ASL)
can be found. Do not send the
ASL directly to the list as it can be
very large. Generate a copy of your ASL
by running this command:&prompt.root; acpidump -t -d > name-system.asl(Substitute your login name for
name and manufacturer/model for
system. Example:
njl-FooCo6000.asl)Most of the developers watch the &a.current;
but please submit problems to &a.acpi.name; to be sure it is
seen. Please be patient, all of us have full-time jobs
elsewhere. If your bug is not immediately apparent, we will
probably ask you to submit a PR via
&man.send-pr.1;. When entering a PR, please
include the same information as requested above. This will help
us track the problem and resolve it. Do not send a
PR without emailing &a.acpi.name; first as we use
PRs as reminders of existing problems, not a
reporting mechanism. It is likely that your problem has been
reported by someone before.BackgroundACPIACPI is present in all modern computers
that conform to the ia32 (x86), ia64 (Itanium), and amd64 (AMD)
architectures. The full standard has many features including
CPU performance management, power planes
control, thermal zones, various battery systems, embedded
controllers, and bus enumeration. Most systems implement less
than the full standard. For instance, a desktop system usually
only implements the bus enumeration parts while a laptop might
have cooling and battery management support as well. Laptops
also have suspend and resume, with their own associated
complexity.An ACPI-compliant system has various
components. The BIOS and chipset vendors
provide various fixed tables (e.g., FADT)
in memory that specify things like the APIC
map (used for SMP), config registers, and
simple configuration values. Additionally, a table of bytecode
(the Differentiated System Description Table
DSDT) is provided that specifies a
tree-like name space of devices and methods.The ACPI driver must parse the fixed
tables, implement an interpreter for the bytecode, and modify
device drivers and the kernel to accept information from the
ACPI subsystem. For &os;, &intel; has
provided an interpreter (ACPI-CA) that is
shared with Linux and NetBSD. The path to the
ACPI-CA source code is
src/sys/contrib/dev/acpica.
The glue code that allows ACPI-CA to work on
&os; is in
src/sys/dev/acpica/Osd. Finally, drivers
that implement various ACPI devices are found
in
src/sys/dev/acpica.Common ProblemsACPIproblemsFor ACPI to work correctly, all the parts
have to work correctly. Here are some common problems, in order
of frequency of appearance, and some possible workarounds or
fixes.Mouse IssuesIn some cases, resuming from a suspend operation will
cause the mouse to fail. A known work around is to add
hint.psm.0.flags="0x3000" to the
/boot/loader.conf file. If this
does not work then please consider sending a bug report
as described above.Suspend/ResumeACPI has three suspend to
RAM (STR) states,
S1-S3, and one suspend
to disk state (STD), called
S4. S5 is
soft off and is the normal state your system
is in when plugged in but not powered up.
S4 can actually be implemented two separate
ways. S4BIOS is a
BIOS-assisted suspend to disk.
S4OS is implemented
entirely by the operating system.Start by checking sysctl hw.acpi
for the suspend-related items. Here
are the results for a Thinkpad:hw.acpi.supported_sleep_state: S3 S4 S5
hw.acpi.s4bios: 0This means that we can use acpiconf -s
to test S3,
S4OS, and
S5. If was one
(1), we would have
S4BIOS
support instead of S4
OS.When testing suspend/resume, start with
S1, if supported. This state is most
likely to work since it does not require much driver support.
No one has implemented S2 but if you have
it, it is similar to S1. The next thing
to try is S3. This is the deepest
STR state and requires a lot of driver
support to properly reinitialize your hardware. If you have
problems resuming, feel free to email the &a.acpi.name; list but
do not expect the problem to be resolved since there are a lot
of drivers/hardware that need more testing and work.To help isolate the problem, remove as many drivers from
your kernel as possible. If it works, you can narrow down
which driver is the problem by loading drivers until it fails
again. Typically binary drivers like
nvidia.ko, X11
display drivers, and USB will have the most
problems while Ethernet interfaces usually work fine. If you
can properly load/unload the drivers, you can automate this by
putting the appropriate commands in
/etc/rc.suspend and
/etc/rc.resume. There is a
commented-out example for unloading and loading a driver. Try
setting to zero (0) if
your display is messed up after resume. Try setting longer or
shorter values for to see
if that helps.Another thing to try is load a recent Linux distribution
with ACPI support and test their
suspend/resume support on the same hardware. If it works
on Linux, it is likely a &os; driver problem and narrowing down
which driver causes the problems will help us fix the problem.
Note that the ACPI maintainers do not
usually maintain other drivers (e.g sound,
ATA, etc.) so any work done on tracking
down a driver problem should probably eventually be posted
to the &a.current.name; list and mailed to the driver
maintainer. If you are feeling adventurous, go ahead and
start putting some debugging &man.printf.3;s in a problematic
driver to track down where in its resume function it
hangs.Finally, try disabling ACPI and
enabling APM instead. If suspend/resume
works with APM, you may be better off
sticking with APM, especially on older
hardware (pre-2000). It took vendors a while to get
ACPI support correct and older hardware is
more likely to have BIOS problems with
ACPI.System Hangs (temporary or permanent)Most system hangs are a result of lost interrupts or an
interrupt storm. Chipsets have a lot of problems based on how
the BIOS configures interrupts before boot,
correctness of the APIC
(MADT) table, and routing of the
System Control Interrupt
(SCI).interrupt stormsInterrupt storms can be distinguished from lost interrupts
by checking the output of vmstat -i
and looking at the line that has
acpi0. If the counter is increasing at more
than a couple per second, you have an interrupt storm. If the
system appears hung, try breaking to DDB
(CTRLALTESC on
console) and type show interrupts.APICdisablingYour best hope when dealing with interrupt problems is to
try disabling APIC support with
hint.apic.0.disabled="1" in
loader.conf.PanicsPanics are relatively rare for ACPI and
are the top priority to be fixed. The first step is to
isolate the steps to reproduce the panic (if possible)
and get a backtrace. Follow the advice for enabling
options DDB and setting up a serial console
(see )
or setting up a &man.dump.8; partition. You can get a
backtrace in DDB with
tr. If you have to handwrite the
backtrace, be sure to at least get the lowest five (5) and top
five (5) lines in the trace.Then, try to isolate the problem by booting with
ACPI disabled. If that works, you can
isolate the ACPI subsystem by using various
values of . See the
&man.acpi.4; manual page for some examples.System Powers Up After Suspend or ShutdownFirst, try setting
hw.acpi.disable_on_poweroff="0"
in &man.loader.conf.5;. This keeps ACPI
from disabling various events during the shutdown process.
Some systems need this value set to 1 (the
default) for the same reason. This usually fixes
the problem of a system powering up spontaneously after a
suspend or poweroff.Other ProblemsIf you have other problems with ACPI
(working with a docking station, devices not detected, etc.),
please email a description to the mailing list as well;
however, some of these issues may be related to unfinished
parts of the ACPI subsystem so they might
take a while to be implemented. Please be patient and
prepared to test patches we may send you.ASL, acpidump, and
IASLACPIASLThe most common problem is the BIOS
vendors providing incorrect (or outright buggy!) bytecode. This
is usually manifested by kernel console messages like
this:ACPI-1287: *** Error: Method execution failed [\\_SB_.PCI0.LPC0.FIGD._STA] \\
(Node 0xc3f6d160), AE_NOT_FOUNDOften, you can resolve these problems by updating your
BIOS to the latest revision. Most console
messages are harmless but if you have other problems like
- battery status not working, they're a good place to start
+ battery status not working, they are a good place to start
looking for problems in the AML. The
bytecode, known as AML, is compiled from a
source language called ASL. The
AML is found in the table known as the
DSDT. To get a copy of your
ASL, use &man.acpidump.8;. You should use
both the (show contents of the fixed tables)
and (disassemble AML to
ASL) options. See the
Submitting Debugging
Information section for an example syntax.The simplest first check you can do is to recompile your
ASL to check for errors. Warnings can
usually be ignored but errors are bugs that will usually prevent
ACPI from working correctly. To recompile
your ASL, issue the following command:&prompt.root; iasl your.aslFixing Your ASLACPIASLIn the long run, our goal is for almost everyone to have
ACPI work without any user intervention. At
this point, however, we are still developing workarounds for
common mistakes made by the BIOS vendors.
The µsoft; interpreter (acpi.sys and
acpiec.sys) does not strictly check for
adherence to the standard, and thus many BIOS
vendors who only test ACPI under &windows;
never fix their ASL. We hope to continue to
identify and document exactly what non-standard behavior is
allowed by µsoft;'s interpreter and replicate it so &os; can
work without forcing users to fix the ASL.
As a workaround and to help us identify behavior, you can fix
the ASL manually. If this works for you,
please send a &man.diff.1; of the old and new
ASL so we can possibly work around the buggy
behavior in ACPI-CA and thus make your fix
unnecessary.ACPIerror messagesHere is a list of common error messages, their cause, and
how to fix them:_OS dependenciesSome AML assumes the world consists of
various &windows; versions. You can tell &os; to claim it is
any OS to see if this fixes problems you
may have. An easy way to override this is to set
hw.acpi.osname="Windows 2001"
in /boot/loader.conf or other similar
strings you find in the ASL.Missing Return statementsSome methods do not explicitly return a value as the
standard requires. While ACPI-CA
does not handle this, &os; has a workaround that allows it to
return the value implicitly. You can also add explicit
Return statements where required if you know what value should
be returned. To force iasl to compile the
ASL, use the
flag.Overriding the Default AMLAfter you customize your.asl, you
will want to compile it, run:&prompt.root; iasl your.aslYou can add the flag to force creation
of the AML, even if there are errors during
compilation. Remember that some errors (e.g., missing Return
statements) are automatically worked around by the
interpreter.DSDT.aml is the default output
filename for iasl. You can load this
instead of your BIOS's buggy copy (which
is still present in flash memory) by editing
/boot/loader.conf as
follows:acpi_dsdt_load="YES"
acpi_dsdt_name="/boot/DSDT.aml"Be sure to copy your DSDT.aml to the
/boot directory.Getting Debugging Output From
ACPIACPIproblemsACPIdebuggingThe ACPI driver has a very flexible
debugging facility. It allows you to specify a set of subsystems
as well as the level of verbosity. The subsystems you wish to
debug are specified as layers and are broken down
into ACPI-CA components (ACPI_ALL_COMPONENTS)
and ACPI hardware support (ACPI_ALL_DRIVERS).
The verbosity of debugging output is specified as the
level and ranges from ACPI_LV_ERROR (just report
errors) to ACPI_LV_VERBOSE (everything). The
level is a bitmask so multiple options can be set
at once, separated by spaces. In practice, you will want to use
a serial console to log the output if it is so long
it flushes the console message buffer. A full list of the
individual layers and levels is found in the &man.acpi.4; manual
page.Debugging output is not enabled by default. To enable it,
add options ACPI_DEBUG to your kernel configuration file
if ACPI is compiled into the kernel. You can
add ACPI_DEBUG=1 to your
/etc/make.conf to enable it globally. If
it is a module, you can recompile just your
acpi.ko module as follows:&prompt.root; cd /sys/modules/acpi/acpi
&& make clean &&
make ACPI_DEBUG=1Install acpi.ko in
/boot/kernel and add your
desired level and layer to loader.conf.
This example enables debug messages for all
ACPI-CA components and all
ACPI hardware drivers
(CPU, LID, etc.) It will
only output error messages, the least verbose level.debug.acpi.layer="ACPI_ALL_COMPONENTS ACPI_ALL_DRIVERS"
debug.acpi.level="ACPI_LV_ERROR"If the information you want is triggered by a specific event
(say, a suspend and then resume), you can leave out changes to
loader.conf and instead use
sysctl to specify the layer and level after
booting and preparing your system for the specific event. The
sysctls are named the same as the tunables
in loader.conf.ReferencesMore information about ACPI may be found
in the following locations:The &a.acpi;The ACPI Mailing List Archives
The old ACPI Mailing List Archives
The ACPI 2.0 Specification
&os; Manual pages: &man.acpi.4;,
&man.acpi.thermal.4;, &man.acpidump.8;, &man.iasl.8;,
&man.acpidb.8;
DSDT debugging resource.
(Uses Compaq as an example but generally useful.)
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/cutting-edge/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/cutting-edge/chapter.sgml
index 1865ae3767..7457c3e9f9 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/cutting-edge/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/cutting-edge/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,1861 +1,1861 @@
JimMockRestructured, reorganized, and parts updated by JordanHubbardOriginal work by Poul-HenningKampJohnPolstraNikClaytonThe Cutting EdgeSynopsis&os; is under constant development between releases. For
people who want to be on the cutting edge, there are several easy
mechanisms for keeping your system in sync with the latest
developments. Be warned—the cutting edge is not for everyone!
This chapter will help you decide if you want to track the
development system, or stick with one of the released
versions.After reading this chapter, you will know:The difference between the two development
branches: &os.stable; and &os.current;.How to keep your system up to date with
CVSup,
CVS, or
CTM.How to rebuild and reinstall the entire base
system with make buildworld (etc).Before reading this chapter, you should:Properly set up your network connection ().Know how to install additional third-party
software ().&os.current; vs. &os.stable;-CURRENT-STABLEThere are two development branches to FreeBSD: &os.current; and
&os.stable;. This section will explain a bit about each and describe
how to keep your system up-to-date with each respective tree.
&os.current; will be discussed first, then &os.stable;.Staying Current with &os;As you read this, keep in mind that &os.current; is the
bleeding edge of &os; development.
&os.current; users are expected to have a high degree of
technical skill, and should be capable of solving difficult
system problems on their own. If you are new to &os;, think
twice before installing it. What Is &os.current;?snapshot&os.current; is the latest working sources for &os;.
This includes work in progress, experimental changes, and
transitional mechanisms that might or might not be present
in the next official release of the software. While many
&os; developers compile the &os.current; source code daily,
there are periods of time when the sources are not
buildable. These problems are resolved as expeditiously as
possible, but whether or not &os.current; brings disaster or
greatly desired functionality can be a matter of which exact
moment you grabbed the source code in!Who Needs &os.current;?&os.current; is made available for 3 primary
interest groups:Members of the &os; community who are actively working
on some part of the source tree and for whom keeping
current is an absolute
requirement.Members of the &os; community who are active testers,
willing to spend time solving problems in order to
ensure that &os.current; remains as sane as possible.
These are also people who wish to make topical
suggestions on changes and the general direction of
&os;, and submit patches to implement them.Those who merely wish to keep an eye on things, or
to use the current sources for reference purposes
(e.g. for reading, not running).
These people also make the occasional comment or
contribute code.What Is &os.current; Not?A fast-track to getting pre-release bits because you
heard there is some cool new feature in there and you
want to be the first on your block to have it. Being
the first on the block to get the new feature means that
- you're the first on the block to get the new
+ you are the first on the block to get the new
bugs.A quick way of getting bug fixes. Any given version
of &os.current; is just as likely to introduce new bugs
as to fix existing ones.In any way officially supported. We
do our best to help people genuinely in one of the 3
legitimate &os.current; groups, but we
simply do not have the time to
provide tech support. This is not because we are mean
and nasty people who do not like helping people out (we
would not even be doing &os; if we were). We simply
cannot answer hundreds messages a day
and work on FreeBSD! Given the
choice between improving &os; and answering lots of
questions on experimental code, the developers opt for
the former.Using &os.current;-CURRENTusingJoin the &a.current.name; and the &a.cvsall.name; lists. This is not
just a good idea, it is essential. If
you are not on the &a.current.name; list,
you will not see the comments that people are
making about the current state of the system and thus will
probably end up stumbling over a lot of problems that others
have already found and solved. Even more importantly, you
will miss out on important bulletins which may be critical
to your system's continued health.The &a.cvsall.name; list will allow you to see the
commit log entry for each change as it is made along with
any pertinent information on possible side-effects.To join these lists, or one of the others available
go to &a.mailman.lists.link; and click on the list that
you wish to subscribe to. Instructions on the rest of
the procedure are available there.Grab the sources from a &os; mirror
site. You can do this in one of two ways:cvsupcron-CURRENTSyncing with CVSupUse the cvsup program
with the supfile named standard-supfile
available from /usr/share/examples/cvsup.
This is the most recommended
method, since it allows you to grab the entire
collection once and then only what has changed from then
on. Many people run cvsup from
cron and keep their
sources up-to-date automatically. You have to
customize the sample supfile above, and configure
cvsup for your environment.-CURRENTSyncing with CTMUse the CTM facility. If you
have very bad connectivity (high price connections or
only email access) CTM is an option.
However, it is a lot of hassle and can give you broken files.
This leads to it being rarely used, which again increases
the chance of it not working for fairly long periods of
time. We recommend using
CVSup
for anybody with a 9600 bps modem or faster connection.
If you are grabbing the sources to run, and not just
look at, then grab all of &os.current;, not
just selected portions. The reason for this is that various
parts of the source depend on updates elsewhere, and trying
to compile just a subset is almost guaranteed to get you
into trouble.-CURRENTcompilingBefore compiling &os.current;, read the
Makefile in /usr/src
carefully. You should at least install a new kernel and rebuild the world the first time through
as part of the upgrading process. Reading the &a.current;
and /usr/src/UPDATING will keep you up-to-date on other bootstrapping procedures
that sometimes become necessary as we move toward the next
release.Be active! If you are running &os.current;, we want
to know what you have to say about it, especially if you
have suggestions for enhancements or bug fixes. Suggestions
with accompanying code are received most
enthusiastically!Staying Stable with &os;What Is &os.stable;?-STABLE&os.stable; is our development branch from which major releases
are made. Changes go into this branch at a different pace, and
with the general assumption that they have first gone into
&os.current; for testing. This is still
a development branch, however, and this means that at any given time,
the sources for &os.stable; may or may not be suitable for any
particular purpose. It is simply another engineering development
track, not a resource for end-users.Who Needs &os.stable;?If you are interested in tracking or contributing to the
FreeBSD development process, especially as it relates to the
next point release of FreeBSD, then you should
consider following &os.stable;.While it is true that security fixes also go into the
&os.stable; branch, you do not need to
track &os.stable; to do this. Every security advisory for
FreeBSD explains how to fix the problem for the releases it
affects
That is not quite true. We can not continue to
support old releases of FreeBSD forever, although we do
support them for many years. For a complete description
of the current security policy for old releases of
FreeBSD, please see http://www.FreeBSD.org/security/.
, and tracking an entire development branch just
for security reasons is likely to bring in a lot of unwanted
changes as well.Although we endeavor to ensure that the &os.stable; branch
compiles and runs at all times, this cannot be guaranteed. In
addition, while code is developed in &os.current; before including
it in &os.stable;, more people run &os.stable; than &os.current;, so
it is inevitable that bugs and corner cases will sometimes be found
in &os.stable; that were not apparent in &os.current;.For these reasons, we do not recommend that
you blindly track &os.stable;, and it is particularly important that
you do not update any production servers to &os.stable; without
first thoroughly testing the code in your development
environment.If you do not have the resources to do this then we recommend
that you run the most recent release of FreeBSD, and use the binary
update mechanism to move from release to release.Using &os.stable;-STABLEusingJoin the &a.stable.name; list. This will keep you informed of
build-dependencies that may appear in &os.stable;
or any other issues requiring
special attention. Developers will also make announcements
in this mailing list when they are contemplating some
controversial fix or update, giving the users a chance to
respond if they have any issues to raise concerning the
proposed change.The &a.cvsall.name; list will allow you to see the
commit log entry for each change as it is made along with
any pertinent information on possible side-effects.To join these lists, or one of the others available
go to &a.mailman.lists.link; and click on the list that
you wish to subscribe to. Instructions on the rest of
the procedure are available there.If you are installing a new system and want it to be as
stable as possible, you can simply grab the latest dated
branch snapshot from
and install it like any other release. Or you can
install the most recent &os.stable; release from the
mirror sites and follow
the instructions below to upgrade your system to the
most up to date &os.stable; source code.If you are already running a previous release of &os;
and wish to upgrade via sources then you can easily do so
from &os; mirror site. This can
be done in one of two ways:cvsupcron-STABLEsyncing with CVSupUse the cvsup program
with the supfile named stable-supfile
from the directory
/usr/share/examples/cvsup.
This is the most recommended
method, since it allows you to grab the entire
collection once and then only what has changed from then
on. Many people run cvsup from
cron to keep their
sources up-to-date automatically. You have to
customize the sample supfile above,
and configure cvsup for your
environment.-STABLEsyncing with CTMUse the CTM facility. If
you do not have a fast and inexpensive connection to
the Internet, this is the method you should consider
using.
Essentially, if you need rapid on-demand access to the
source and communications bandwidth is not a consideration,
use cvsup or ftp.
Otherwise, use CTM.-STABLEcompilingBefore compiling &os.stable;, read the
Makefile in /usr/src
carefully. You should at least install a new kernel and rebuild the world the first time through
as part of the upgrading process. Reading the &a.stable; and /usr/src/UPDATING will
keep you up-to-date on other bootstrapping procedures that
sometimes become necessary as we move toward the next
release.Synchronizing Your SourceThere are various ways of using an Internet (or email)
connection to stay up-to-date with any given area of the &os;
project sources, or all areas, depending on what interests you. The
primary services we offer are Anonymous
CVS, CVSup, and CTM.While it is possible to update only parts of your source tree,
the only supported update procedure is to update the entire tree
and recompile both userland (i.e., all the programs that run in
user space, such as those in /bin and
/sbin) and kernel sources. Updating only part
of your source tree, only the kernel, or only userland will often
result in problems. These problems may range from compile errors
to kernel panics or data corruption.CVSanonymousAnonymous CVS and
CVSup use the pull
model of updating sources. In the case of
CVSup the user (or a
cron script) invokes
the cvsup program, and it interacts with a
cvsupd server somewhere to bring your files
up-to-date. The updates you receive are up-to-the-minute and you
get them when, and only when, you want them. You can easily
restrict your updates to the specific files or directories that are
of interest to you. Updates are generated on the fly by the server,
according to what you have and what you want to have.
Anonymous CVS is quite a bit more
simplistic than CVSup in that it is just an extension to
CVS which allows it to pull changes
directly from a remote CVS repository.
CVSup can do this far more efficiently,
but Anonymous CVS is easier to
use.CTMCTM, on the other hand, does not
interactively compare the sources you have with those on the master
archive or otherwise pull them across. Instead, a script which
identifies changes in files since its previous run is executed
several times a day on the master CTM machine, any detected changes
being compressed, stamped with a sequence-number and encoded for
transmission over email (in printable ASCII only). Once received,
these CTM deltas can then be handed to the
&man.ctm.rmail.1; utility which will automatically decode, verify
and apply the changes to the user's copy of the sources. This
process is far more efficient than CVSup,
and places less strain on our server resources since it is a
push rather than a pull
model.There are other trade-offs, of course. If you inadvertently
wipe out portions of your archive, CVSup
will detect and rebuild the damaged portions for you.
CTM will not do this, and if you wipe some
portion of your source tree out (and do not have it backed up) then
you will have to start from scratch (from the most recent CVS
base delta) and rebuild it all with CTM or, with
Anonymous CVS, simply delete the bad bits and resync.Rebuilding worldRebuilding worldOnce you have synchronized your local source tree against a
particular version of &os; (&os.stable;, &os.current;, and so on)
you can then use the source
tree to rebuild the system.Take a BackupIt cannot be stressed enough how important it is to take a
backup of your system before you do this.
While rebuilding the world is (as long as you follow these
instructions) an easy task to do, there will inevitably be times
when you make mistakes, or when mistakes made by others in the
source tree render your system unbootable.Make sure you have taken a backup. And have a fixit floppy or
bootable CD at
hand. You will probably never have to use it, but it is better to be
safe than sorry!Subscribe to the Right Mailing Listmailing listThe &os.stable; and &os.current; branches are, by their
nature, in development. People that
contribute to &os; are human, and mistakes occasionally
happen.Sometimes these mistakes can be quite harmless, just causing
your system to print a new diagnostic warning. Or the change may
be catastrophic, and render your system unbootable or destroy your
file systems (or worse).If problems like these occur, a heads up is
posted to the appropriate mailing list, explaining the nature of
the problem and which systems it affects. And an all
clear announcement is posted when the problem has been
solved.If you try to track &os.stable; or &os.current; and do
not read the &a.stable; or the
&a.current; respectively, then you are
asking for trouble.Do not use make worldA lot of older documentation recommends using
make world for this. Doing that skips
some important steps and should only be used if you are
sure of what you are doing. For almost all circumstances
make world is the wrong thing to do, and
the procedure described here should be used instead.The Canonical Way to Update Your SystemTo update your system, you should check
/usr/src/UPDATING for any pre-buildworld steps
necessary for your version of the sources and then use the following
procedure:&prompt.root; make buildworld
&prompt.root; make buildkernel
&prompt.root; make installkernel
&prompt.root; rebootThere are a few rare cases when an extra run of
mergemaster -p is needed before the
buildworld step. These are
described in UPDATING. In general,
though, you can safely omit this step if you are not
updating across one or more major &os; versions.After installkernel finishes
successfully, you should boot in single user mode
(i.e. using boot -s from the loader
prompt). Then run:&prompt.root; mergemaster -p
&prompt.root; make installworld
&prompt.root; mergemaster
&prompt.root; rebootRead Further ExplanationsThe sequence described above is only a short resume to
help you getting started. You should however read the
following sections to clearly understand each step, especially
if you want to use a custom kernel configuration.Read /usr/src/UPDATINGBefore you do anything else, read
/usr/src/UPDATING (or the equivalent file
wherever you have a copy of the source code). This file should
contain important information about problems you might encounter, or
specify the order in which you might have to run certain commands.
If UPDATING contradicts something you read here,
UPDATING takes precedence.Reading UPDATING is not an acceptable
substitute for subscribing to the correct mailing list, as described
previously. The two requirements are complementary, not
exclusive.Check /etc/make.confmake.confExamine the files
/usr/share/examples/etc/make.conf
(called /etc/defaults/make.conf in &os; 4.X) and
/etc/make.conf. The first contains some
default defines – most of which are commented out. To
make use of them when you rebuild your system from source, add
them to /etc/make.conf. Keep in mind that
anything you add to /etc/make.conf is also
used every time you run make, so it is a good
idea to set them to something sensible for your system.A typical user will probably want to copy the
CFLAGS and
NOPROFILE lines found in
/usr/share/examples/etc/make.conf
(or in /etc/defaults/make.conf on &os; 4.X) to
/etc/make.conf and uncomment them.Examine the other definitions (COPTFLAGS,
NOPORTDOCS and so
on) and decide if they are relevant to you.Update the Files in /etcThe /etc directory contains a large part
of your system's configuration information, as well as scripts
that are run at system startup. Some of these scripts change from
version to version of FreeBSD.Some of the configuration files are also used in the day to
day running of the system. In particular,
/etc/group.There have been occasions when the installation part of
make installworld has expected certain usernames or groups
to exist. When performing an upgrade it is likely that these
users or groups did not exist. This caused problems when upgrading.
In some cases make buildworld will check to see if
these users or groups exist.A recent example of this is when the
smmsp user was added. Users had the
installation process fail for them when
&man.mtree.8; was trying to create
/var/spool/clientmqueue.The solution is to examine
/usr/src/etc/group and compare its list of
groups with your own. If there are any groups in the new file that
are not in your file then copy them over. Similarly, you should
rename any groups in /etc/group which have
the same GID but a different name to those in
/usr/src/etc/group.Since 4.6-RELEASE you can run &man.mergemaster.8; in
pre-buildworld mode by providing the option.
This will compare only those files that are essential for the success
of buildworld or
installworld. If your old version of
mergemaster does not support ,
use the new version in the source tree when running for the first
time:&prompt.root; cd /usr/src/usr.sbin/mergemaster
&prompt.root; ./mergemaster.sh -pIf you are feeling particularly paranoid, you can check your
system to see which files are owned by the group you are
renaming or deleting:&prompt.root; find / -group GID -printwill show all files owned by group
GID (which can be either a group name
or a numeric group ID).Drop to Single User Modesingle-user modeYou may want to compile the system in single user mode. Apart
from the obvious benefit of making things go slightly faster,
reinstalling the system will touch a lot of important system
files, all the standard system binaries, libraries, include files
and so on. Changing these on a running system (particularly if
you have active users on the system at the time) is asking for
trouble.multi-user modeAnother method is to compile the system in multi-user mode, and
then drop into single user mode for the installation. If you would
like to do it this way, simply hold off on the following steps until
the build has completed. You can postpone dropping to single user
mode until you have to installkernel or
installworld.As the superuser, you can execute:&prompt.root; shutdown nowfrom a running system, which will drop it to single user
mode.Alternatively, reboot the system, and at the boot prompt,
enter the flag. The system will then boot
single user. At the shell prompt you should then run:&prompt.root; fsck -p
&prompt.root; mount -u /
&prompt.root; mount -a -t ufs
&prompt.root; swapon -aThis checks the file systems, remounts /
read/write, mounts all the other UFS file systems referenced in
/etc/fstab and then turns swapping on.If your CMOS clock is set to local time and not to GMT
(this is true if the output of the &man.date.1; command
does not show the correct time and zone),
you may also need to run the following command:&prompt.root; adjkerntz -iThis will make sure that your local time-zone settings
get set up correctly — without this, you may later run into some
problems.
Remove /usr/objAs parts of the system are rebuilt they are placed in
directories which (by default) go under
/usr/obj. The directories shadow those under
/usr/src.You can speed up the make buildworld process, and
possibly save yourself some dependency headaches by removing this
directory as well.Some files below /usr/obj may have the
immutable flag set (see &man.chflags.1; for more information)
which must be removed first.&prompt.root; cd /usr/obj
&prompt.root; chflags -R noschg *
&prompt.root; rm -rf *Recompile the SourceSaving the OutputIt is a good idea to save the output you get from running
&man.make.1; to another file. If something goes wrong you will
have a copy of the error message. While this might not help you
in diagnosing what has gone wrong, it can help others if you post
your problem to one of the &os; mailing lists.The easiest way to do this is to use the &man.script.1;
command, with a parameter that specifies the name of the file to
save all output to. You would do this immediately before
rebuilding the world, and then type exit
when the process has finished.&prompt.root; script /var/tmp/mw.out
Script started, output file is /var/tmp/mw.out
&prompt.root; make TARGET… compile, compile, compile …
&prompt.root; exit
Script done, …If you do this, do not save the output
in /tmp. This directory may be cleared
next time you reboot. A better place to store it is in
/var/tmp (as in the previous example) or
in root's home directory.Compile the Base SystemYou must be in the /usr/src
directory:&prompt.root; cd /usr/src(unless, of course, your source code is elsewhere, in which
case change to that directory instead).makeTo rebuild the world you use the &man.make.1; command. This
command reads instructions from the Makefile,
which describes how the programs that comprise &os; should be
rebuilt, the order in which they should be built, and so on.The general format of the command line you will type is as
follows:&prompt.root; make -x -DVARIABLEtargetIn this example,
is an option that you would pass to &man.make.1;. See the
&man.make.1; manual page for an example of the options you can
pass.
passes a variable to the Makefile. The
behavior of the Makefile is controlled by
these variables. These are the same variables as are set in
/etc/make.conf, and this provides another
way of setting them.&prompt.root; make -DNOPROFILE targetis another way of specifying that profiled libraries should
not be built, and corresponds with theNOPROFILE= true # Avoid compiling profiled librariesline in /etc/make.conf.target tells &man.make.1; what
you want to do. Each Makefile defines a
number of different targets, and your choice of
target determines what happens.Some targets are listed in the
Makefile, but are not meant for you to run.
Instead, they are used by the build process to break out the
steps necessary to rebuild the system into a number of
sub-steps.Most of the time you will not need to pass any parameters to
&man.make.1;, and so your command like will look like
this:&prompt.root; make targetBeginning with version 2.2.5 of &os; (actually, it was
first created on the &os.current; branch, and then retrofitted to
&os.stable; midway between 2.2.2 and 2.2.5) the
world target has been split in
two: buildworld and
installworld. Beginning with version
5.3 of &os; the world target will be changed
so it will not work at all by default because it is actually
dangerous for most users.As the names imply, buildworld
builds a complete new tree under /usr/obj,
and installworld installs this tree on
the current machine.This is very useful for 2 reasons. First, it allows you
to do the build safe in the knowledge that no components of
your running system will be affected. The build is
self hosted. Because of this, you can safely
run buildworld on a machine running
in multi-user mode with no fear of ill-effects. It is still
recommended that you run the
installworld part in single user
mode, though.Secondly, it allows you to use NFS mounts to upgrade
multiple machines on your network. If you have three machines,
A, B and C that you want to upgrade, run make
buildworld and make installworld on
A. B and C should then NFS mount /usr/src
and /usr/obj from A, and you can then run
make installworld to install the results of
the build on B and C.Although the world target still exists,
you are strongly encouraged not to use it.Run&prompt.root; make buildworldIt is now possible to specify a option to
make which will cause it to spawn several
simultaneous processes. This is most useful on multi-CPU machines.
However, since much of the compiling process is IO bound rather
than CPU bound it is also useful on single CPU machines.On a typical single-CPU machine you would run:&prompt.root; make -j4 buildworld&man.make.1; will then have up to 4 processes running at any one
time. Empirical evidence posted to the mailing lists shows this
generally gives the best performance benefit.If you have a multi-CPU machine and you are using an SMP
configured kernel try values between 6 and 10 and see how they speed
things up.Be aware that this is still somewhat experimental, and commits
to the source tree may occasionally break this feature. If the
world fails to compile using this parameter try again without it
before you report any problems.Timingsrebuilding worldtimingsMany factors influence the build time, but currently a 500 MHz
&pentium; III with 128 MB of RAM takes about 2 hours to build
the &os.stable; tree, with no tricks or shortcuts used during the
process. A &os.current; tree will take somewhat longer.Compile and Install a New KernelkernelcompilingTo take full advantage of your new system you should recompile the
kernel. This is practically a necessity, as certain memory structures
may have changed, and programs like &man.ps.1; and &man.top.1; will
fail to work until the kernel and source code versions are the
same.The simplest, safest way to do this is to build and install a
kernel based on GENERIC. While
GENERIC may not have all the necessary devices
for your system, it should contain everything necessary to boot your
system back to single user mode. This is a good test that the new
system works properly. After booting from
GENERIC and verifying that your system works you
can then build a new kernel based on your normal kernel configuration
file.On modern versions of FreeBSD it is important to build world before building a
new kernel.If you want to build a custom kernel, and already have a configuration
file, just use KERNCONF=MYKERNEL
like this:&prompt.root; cd /usr/src
&prompt.root; make buildkernel KERNCONF=MYKERNEL
&prompt.root; make installkernel KERNCONF=MYKERNELIn FreeBSD 4.2 and older you must replace
KERNCONF= with KERNEL=.
4.2-STABLE that was fetched before Feb 2nd, 2001 does not
recognize KERNCONF=.Note that if you have raised kern.securelevel
above 1 and you have set either the
noschg or similar flags to your kernel binary, you
might find it necessary to drop into single user mode to use
installkernel. Otherwise you should be able
to run both these commands from multi user mode without
problems. See &man.init.8; for details about
kern.securelevel and &man.chflags.1; for details
about the various file flags.If you are upgrading to a version of &os; below 4.0 you should
use the old kernel build procedure. However, it is recommended
that you use the new version of &man.config.8;, using a command line
like this.&prompt.root; /usr/obj/usr/src/usr.sbin/config/config KERNELNAMEReboot into Single User Modesingle-user modeYou should reboot into single user mode to test the new kernel
works. Do this by following the instructions in
.Install the New System BinariesIf you were building a version of &os; recent enough to have
used make buildworld then you should now use
installworld to install the new system
binaries.Run&prompt.root; cd /usr/src
&prompt.root; make installworldIf you specified variables on the make
buildworld command line, you must specify the same
variables in the make installworld command
line. This does not necessarily hold true for other options;
for example, must never be used with
installworld.For example, if you ran:&prompt.root; make -DNOPROFILE buildworldyou must install the results with:&prompt.root; make -DNOPROFILE installworldotherwise it would try to install profiled libraries that
had not been built during the make buildworld
phase.Update Files Not Updated by make installworldRemaking the world will not update certain directories (in
particular, /etc, /var and
/usr) with new or changed configuration files.The simplest way to update these files is to use
&man.mergemaster.8;, though it is possible to do it manually
if you would prefer to do that. Regardless of which way you
choose, be sure to make a backup of /etc in
case anything goes wrong.TomRhodesContributed by mergemastermergemasterThe &man.mergemaster.8; utility is a Bourne script that will
aid you in determining the differences between your configuration files
in /etc, and the configuration files in
the source tree /usr/src/etc. This is
the recommended solution for keeping the system configuration files up to date
with those located in the source tree.mergemaster was integrated into the FreeBSD base
system between 3.3-RELEASE and 3.4-RELEASE, which means it is
present in all -STABLE and -CURRENT systems since 3.3.To begin simply type mergemaster at your prompt, and
watch it start going. mergemaster will then build a
temporary root environment, from / down, and populate
it with various system configuration files. Those files are then compared
to the ones currently installed in your system. At this point, files that
differ will be shown in &man.diff.1; format, with the sign
representing added or modified lines, and representing
lines that will be either removed completely, or replaced with a new line.
See the &man.diff.1; manual page for more information about the &man.diff.1;
syntax and how file differences are shown.&man.mergemaster.8; will then show you each file that displays variances,
and at this point you will have the option of either deleting the new file (referred
to as the temporary file), installing the temporary file in its unmodified state,
merging the temporary file with the currently installed file, or viewing the
&man.diff.1; results again.Choosing to delete the temporary file will tell &man.mergemaster.8; that we
wish to keep our current file unchanged, and to delete the new version.
This option is not recommended, unless you see no
reason to change the current file. You can get help at any time by
typing ? at the &man.mergemaster.8; prompt. If the user
chooses to skip a file, it will be presented again after all other files
have been dealt with.Choosing to install the unmodified temporary file will replace the
current file with the new one. For most unmodified files, this is the best
option.Choosing to merge the file will present you with a text editor,
and the contents of both files. You can now merge them by
reviewing both files side by side on the screen, and choosing parts from
both to create a finished product. When the files are compared side by side,
the l key will select the left contents and the
r key will select contents from your right.
The final output will be a file consisting of both parts, which can then be
installed. This option is customarily used for files where settings have been
modified by the user.Choosing to view the &man.diff.1; results again will show you the file differences
just like &man.mergemaster.8; did before prompting you for an option.After &man.mergemaster.8; is done with the system files you will be
prompted for other options. &man.mergemaster.8; may ask if you want to rebuild
the password file and/or run &man.MAKEDEV.8; if you run a FreeBSD version prior to 5.0, and will finish up with an option to
remove left-over temporary files.Manual UpdateIf you wish to do the update manually, however,
you cannot just copy over the files from
/usr/src/etc to /etc and
have it work. Some of these files must be installed
first. This is because the /usr/src/etc
directory is not a copy of what your
/etc directory should look like. In addition,
there are files that should be in /etc that are
not in /usr/src/etc.If you are using &man.mergemaster.8; (as recommended),
you can skip forward to the next
section.The simplest way to do this by hand is to install the
files into a new directory, and then work through them looking
for differences.Backup Your Existing /etcAlthough, in theory, nothing is going to touch this directory
automatically, it is always better to be sure. So copy your
existing /etc directory somewhere safe.
Something like:&prompt.root; cp -Rp /etc /etc.old does a recursive copy,
preserves times, ownerships on files and suchlike.You need to build a dummy set of directories to install the new
/etc and other files into.
/var/tmp/root is a reasonable choice, and
there are a number of subdirectories required under this as
well.&prompt.root; mkdir /var/tmp/root
&prompt.root; cd /usr/src/etc
&prompt.root; make DESTDIR=/var/tmp/root distrib-dirs distributionThis will build the necessary directory structure and install the
files. A lot of the subdirectories that have been created under
/var/tmp/root are empty and should be deleted.
The simplest way to do this is to:&prompt.root; cd /var/tmp/root
&prompt.root; find -d . -type d | xargs rmdir 2>/dev/nullThis will remove all empty directories. (Standard error is
redirected to /dev/null to prevent the warnings
about the directories that are not empty.)/var/tmp/root now contains all the files that
should be placed in appropriate locations below
/. You now have to go through each of these
files, determining how they differ with your existing files.Note that some of the files that will have been installed in
/var/tmp/root have a leading .. At the
time of writing the only files like this are shell startup files in
/var/tmp/root/ and
/var/tmp/root/root/, although there may be others
(depending on when you are reading this). Make sure you use
ls -a to catch them.The simplest way to do this is to use &man.diff.1; to compare the
two files:&prompt.root; diff /etc/shells /var/tmp/root/etc/shellsThis will show you the differences between your
/etc/shells file and the new
/var/tmp/root/etc/shells file. Use these to decide whether to
merge in changes that you have made or whether to copy over your old
file.Name the New Root Directory
(/var/tmp/root) with a Time Stamp, so You Can
Easily Compare Differences Between VersionsFrequently rebuilding the world means that you have to update
/etc frequently as well, which can be a bit of
a chore.You can speed this process up by keeping a copy of the last set
of changed files that you merged into /etc.
The following procedure gives one idea of how to do this.Make the world as normal. When you want to update
/etc and the other directories, give the
target directory a name based on the current date. If you were
doing this on the 14th of February 1998 you could do the
following:&prompt.root; mkdir /var/tmp/root-19980214
&prompt.root; cd /usr/src/etc
&prompt.root; make DESTDIR=/var/tmp/root-19980214 \
distrib-dirs distributionMerge in the changes from this directory as outlined
above.Do not remove the
/var/tmp/root-19980214 directory when you
have finished.When you have downloaded the latest version of the source
and remade it, follow step 1. This will give you a new
directory, which might be called
/var/tmp/root-19980221 (if you wait a week
between doing updates).You can now see the differences that have been made in the
intervening week using &man.diff.1; to create a recursive diff
between the two directories:&prompt.root; cd /var/tmp
&prompt.root; diff -r root-19980214 root-19980221Typically, this will be a much smaller set of differences
than those between
/var/tmp/root-19980221/etc and
/etc. Because the set of differences is
smaller, it is easier to migrate those changes across into your
/etc directory.You can now remove the older of the two
/var/tmp/root-* directories:&prompt.root; rm -rf /var/tmp/root-19980214Repeat this process every time you need to merge in changes
to /etc.You can use &man.date.1; to automate the generation of the
directory names:&prompt.root; mkdir /var/tmp/root-`date "+%Y%m%d"`Update /devDEVFSIf you are running FreeBSD 5.0 or later you can safely
skip this section. These versions use &man.devfs.5; to
allocate device nodes transparently for the user.In most cases, the &man.mergemaster.8; tool will realize when
it is necessary to update the device nodes, and offer to complete it
automatically. These instructions tell how to update the device
nodes manually.For safety's sake, this is a multi-step process.Copy /var/tmp/root/dev/MAKEDEV to
/dev:&prompt.root; cp /var/tmp/root/dev/MAKEDEV /devMAKEDEVIf you used &man.mergemaster.8; to
update /etc, then your
MAKEDEV script should have been updated
already, though it cannot hurt to check (with &man.diff.1;)
and copy it manually if necessary.Now, take a snapshot of your current
/dev. This snapshot needs to contain the
permissions, ownerships, major and minor numbers of each filename,
but it should not contain the time stamps. The easiest way to do
this is to use &man.awk.1; to strip out some of the
information:&prompt.root; cd /dev
&prompt.root; ls -l | awk '{print $1, $2, $3, $4, $5, $6, $NF}' > /var/tmp/dev.outRemake all the device nodes:&prompt.root; sh MAKEDEV allWrite another snapshot of the directory, this time to
/var/tmp/dev2.out. Now look through these
two files for any device node that you missed creating. There should
not be any, but it is better to be safe than sorry.&prompt.root; diff /var/tmp/dev.out /var/tmp/dev2.outYou are most likely to notice disk slice discrepancies which
will involve commands such as:&prompt.root; sh MAKEDEV sd0s1to recreate the slice entries. Your precise circumstances may
vary.Update /standThis step is included only for completeness. It can safely be
omitted. If you are using FreeBSD 5.2 or later, the
/rescue directory is automatically updated
for the user with current, statically compiled binaries during
make installworld, thus obsoleting the need
to update /stand (which does not exist at
all on FreeBSD 5.2 and later).For the sake of completeness, you may want to update the files in
/stand as well. These files consist of hard
links to the /stand/sysinstall binary. This
binary should be statically linked, so that it can work when no other
file systems (and in particular /usr) have been
mounted.&prompt.root; cd /usr/src/release/sysinstall
&prompt.root; make all installRebootingYou are now done. After you have verified that everything appears
to be in the right place you can reboot the system. A simple
&man.shutdown.8; should do it:&prompt.root; shutdown -r nowFinishedYou should now have successfully upgraded your &os; system.
Congratulations.If things went slightly wrong, it is easy to rebuild a particular
piece of the system. For example, if you accidentally deleted
/etc/magic as part of the upgrade or merge of
/etc, the &man.file.1; command will stop working.
In this case, the fix would be to run:&prompt.root; cd /usr/src/usr.bin/file
&prompt.root; make all installQuestionsDo I need to re-make the world for every change?There is no easy answer to this one, as it depends on the
nature of the change. For example, if you just ran CVSup, and
it has shown the following files as being updated:src/games/cribbage/instr.csrc/games/sail/pl_main.csrc/release/sysinstall/config.csrc/release/sysinstall/media.csrc/share/mk/bsd.port.mkit probably is not worth rebuilding the entire world.
You could just go to the appropriate sub-directories and
make all install, and that's about it. But
if something major changed, for example
src/lib/libc/stdlib then you should either
re-make the world, or at least those parts of it that are
statically linked (as well as anything else you might have added
that is statically linked).At the end of the day, it is your call. You might be happy
re-making the world every fortnight say, and let changes
accumulate over that fortnight. Or you might want to re-make
just those things that have changed, and be confident you can
spot all the dependencies.And, of course, this all depends on how often you want to
upgrade, and whether you are tracking &os.stable; or
&os.current;.My compile failed with lots of signal 11 (or other signal
number) errors. What has happened?signal 11This is normally indicative of hardware problems.
(Re)making the world is an effective way to stress test your
hardware, and will frequently throw up memory problems. These
normally manifest themselves as the compiler mysteriously dying
on receipt of strange signals.A sure indicator of this is if you can restart the make and
it dies at a different point in the process.In this instance there is little you can do except start
swapping around the components in your machine to determine
which one is failing.Can I remove /usr/obj when I have
finished?The short answer is yes./usr/obj contains all the object files
that were produced during the compilation phase. Normally, one
of the first steps in the make buildworld process is to
remove this directory and start afresh. In this case, keeping
/usr/obj around after you have finished
makes little sense, and will free up a large chunk of disk space
(currently about 340 MB).However, if you know what you are doing you can have
make buildworld skip this step. This will make subsequent
builds run much faster, since most of sources will not need to
be recompiled. The flip side of this is that subtle dependency
problems can creep in, causing your build to fail in odd ways.
This frequently generates noise on the &os; mailing lists,
when one person complains that their build has failed, not
realizing that it is because they have tried to cut
corners.Can interrupted builds be resumed?This depends on how far through the process you got before
you found a problem.In general (and this is not a hard and
fast rule) the make buildworld process builds new
copies of essential tools (such as &man.gcc.1;, and
&man.make.1;) and the system libraries. These tools and
libraries are then installed. The new tools and libraries are
then used to rebuild themselves, and are installed again. The
entire system (now including regular user programs, such as
&man.ls.1; or &man.grep.1;) is then rebuilt with the new
system files.If you are at the last stage, and you know it (because you
have looked through the output that you were storing) then you
can (fairly safely) do:… fix the problem …
&prompt.root; cd /usr/src
&prompt.root; make -DNOCLEAN allThis will not undo the work of the previous
make buildworld.If you see the message:--------------------------------------------------------------
Building everything..
--------------------------------------------------------------in the make buildworld output then it is
probably fairly safe to do so.If you do not see that message, or you are not sure, then it
is always better to be safe than sorry, and restart the build
from scratch.How can I speed up making the world?Run in single user mode.Put the /usr/src and
/usr/obj directories on separate
file systems held on separate disks. If possible, put these
disks on separate disk controllers.Better still, put these file systems across multiple
disks using the &man.ccd.4; (concatenated disk
driver) device.Turn off profiling (set NOPROFILE=true in
/etc/make.conf). You almost certainly
do not need it.Also in /etc/make.conf, set
CFLAGS to something like . The optimization is much
slower, and the optimization difference between
and is normally
negligible. lets the compiler use
pipes rather than temporary files for communication, which
saves disk access (at the expense of memory).Pass the option to &man.make.1; to
run multiple processes in parallel. This usually helps
regardless of whether you have a single or a multi processor
machine.The file system holding
/usr/src can be mounted (or remounted)
with the option. This prevents the
file system from recording the file access time. You probably
do not need this information anyway.&prompt.root; mount -u -o noatime /usr/srcThe example assumes /usr/src is
on its own file system. If it is not (if it is a part of
/usr for example) then you will
need to use that file system mount point, and not
/usr/src.The file system holding /usr/obj can
be mounted (or remounted) with the
option. This causes disk writes to happen asynchronously.
In other words, the write completes immediately, and the
data is written to the disk a few seconds later. This
allows writes to be clustered together, and can be a
dramatic performance boost.Keep in mind that this option makes your file system
more fragile. With this option there is an increased
chance that, should power fail, the file system will be in
an unrecoverable state when the machine restarts.If /usr/obj is the only thing on
this file system then it is not a problem. If you have
other, valuable data on the same file system then ensure
your backups are fresh before you enable this
option.&prompt.root; mount -u -o async /usr/objAs above, if /usr/obj is not on
its own file system, replace it in the example with the
name of the appropriate mount point.What do I do if something goes wrong?Make absolutely sure your environment has no
extraneous cruft from earlier builds. This is simple
enough.&prompt.root; chflags -R noschg /usr/obj/usr
&prompt.root; rm -rf /usr/obj/usr
&prompt.root; cd /usr/src
&prompt.root; make cleandir
&prompt.root; make cleandirYes, make cleandir really should
be run twice.Then restart the whole process, starting
with make buildworld.If you still have problems, send the error and the
output of uname -a to &a.questions;.
Be prepared to answer other questions about your
setup!MikeMeyerContributed by Tracking for Multiple MachinesNFSinstalling multiple machinesIf you have multiple machines that you want to track the
same source tree, then having all of them download sources and
rebuild everything seems like a waste of resources: disk space,
network bandwidth, and CPU cycles. It is, and the solution is
to have one machine do most of the work, while the rest of the
machines mount that work via NFS. This section outlines a
method of doing so.PreliminariesFirst, identify a set of machines that is going to run
the same set of binaries, which we will call a
build set. Each machine can have a
custom kernel, but they will be running the same userland
binaries. From that set, choose a machine to be the
build machine. It is going to be the
machine that the world and kernel are built on. Ideally, it
should be a fast machine that has sufficient spare CPU to
run make buildworld and
make buildkernel. You will also want to
choose a machine to be the test
machine, which will test software updates before they
are put into production. This must be a
machine that you can afford to have down for an extended
period of time. It can be the build machine, but need not be.All the machines in this build set need to mount
/usr/obj and
/usr/src from the same machine, and at
the same point. Ideally, those are on two different drives
on the build machine, but they can be NFS mounted on that machine
as well. If you have multiple build sets,
/usr/src should be on one build machine, and
NFS mounted on the rest.Finally make sure that
/etc/make.conf on all the machines in
the build set agrees with the build machine. That means that
the build machine must build all the parts of the base
system that any machine in the build set is going to
install. Also, each build machine should have its kernel
name set with KERNCONF in
/etc/make.conf, and the build machine
should list them all in KERNCONF, listing
its own kernel first. The build machine must have the kernel
configuration files for each machine in
/usr/src/sys/arch/conf
if it is going to build their kernels.The Base SystemNow that all that is done, you are ready to build
everything. Build the kernel and world as described in on the build machine,
but do not install anything. After the build has finished, go
to the test machine, and install the kernel you just
built. If this machine mounts /usr/src
and /usr/obj via NFS, when you reboot
to single user you will need to enable the network and mount
them. The easiest way to do this is to boot to multi-user,
then run shutdown now to go to single user
mode. Once there, you can install the new kernel and world and run
mergemaster just as you normally would. When
done, reboot to return to normal multi-user operations for this
machine.After you are certain that everything on the test
machine is working properly, use the same procedure to
install the new software on each of the other machines in
the build set.PortsThe same ideas can be used for the ports tree. The first
critical step is mounting /usr/ports from
the same machine to all the machines in the build set. You can
then set up /etc/make.conf properly to share
distfiles. You should set DISTDIR to a
common shared directory that is writable by whichever user
root is mapped to by your NFS mounts. Each
machine should set WRKDIRPREFIX to a
local build directory. Finally, if you are going to be
building and distributing packages, you should set
PACKAGES to a directory similar to
DISTDIR.
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/firewalls/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/firewalls/chapter.sgml
index 74a443417e..3442759459 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/firewalls/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/firewalls/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,3127 +1,3127 @@
Joseph J.BarbishContributed by BradDavisConverted to SGML and updated by FirewallsfirewallsecurityfirewallsIntroductionFirewalls make it possible to filter
incoming and outgoing traffic that flows through your system.
A firewall can use one or more sets of rules to
inspect the network packets as they come in or go out of your
network connections and either allows the traffic through or
blocks it. The rules of a firewall can inspect one or more
characteristics of the packets, including but not limited to the
protocol type, the source or destination host address, and the
source or destination port.Firewalls can greatly enhance the security of a host or a
network. They can be used to do one or more of
the following things:To protect and insulate the applications, services and
machines of your internal network from unwanted traffic
coming in from the public Internet.To limit or disable access from hosts of the internal
network to services of the public Internet.To support network address translation
(NAT), which allows your internal network
to use private IP addresses and share a
single connection to the public Internet (either with a
single IP address or by a shared pool of
automatically assigned public addresses).After reading this chapter, you will know:How to properly define packet filtering rules.The differences between the firewalls
built into &os;.How to use and configure the OpenBSD
PF firewall.How to use and configure
IPFILTER.How to use and configure
IPFW.Before reading this chapter, you should:Understand basic &os; and Internet concepts.Firewall ConceptsfirewallrulesetsThere are two basic ways to create firewall rulesets:
inclusive or exclusive. An
exclusive firewall allows all traffic through except for the
traffic matching the ruleset. An inclusive firewall does the
reverse. It only allows traffic matching the rules through and
blocks everything else.Inclusive firewalls are generally safer than exclusive
firewalls because they significantly reduce the risk of allowing
unwanted traffic to pass through the firewall.Security can be tightened further using a stateful
firewall. With a stateful firewall the firewall keeps
track of which connections are opened through the firewall and
will only allow traffic through which either matches an existing
connection or opens a new one. The disadvantage of a stateful
firewall is that it can be vulnerable to Denial of Service
(DoS) attacks if a lot of new connections are
opened very fast. With most firewalls it is possible to use a
combination of stateful and non-stateful behavior to make an
optimal firewall for the site.Firewall Software Applications&os; has three different firewall software products built into
the base system. They are IPFILTER (also known as IPF),
IPFIREWALL (also known as IPFW) and PF (OpenBSD's PacketFilter). IPFIREWALL has the built
in DUMMYNET traffic shaper facilities for controlling bandwidth
usage. IPFILTER does not have a built in traffic shaper facility
for controlling bandwidth usage, but the ALTQ port application
can be used to accomplish the same function. The DUMMYNET
feature and ALTQ is generally useful only to
large ISPs or commercial users. IPF, IPFW and PF use rules to
control the access of packets to and from your system, although
they go about it different ways and have different rule
syntaxes.The IPFW sample rule set (found in
/etc/rc.firewall) delivered in the basic
install is outdated, complicated and does not use stateful rules
on the interface facing the public Internet. It exclusively uses
legacy stateless rules which only have the ability to open or
close the service ports. The IPFW example stateful rules sets
presented here supercede the
/etc/rc.firewall file distributed with the
system.Stateful rules have technically advanced interrogation
abilities capable of defending against the flood of different
methods currently employed by attackers.All of these firewall software solutions IPF, IPFW and PF still
maintain their legacy heritage of their original rule processing
order and reliance on non-stateful rules. These outdated
concepts are not covered here, only the new, modern stateful
rule construct and rule processing order is presented.You should read about both of them and make your own
decision on which one best fits your needs.The author prefers IPFILTER because its stateful rules are
much less complicated to use in a NAT
environment and it has a built in ftp proxy that simplifies the
rules to allow secure outbound FTP usage. It is also more
appropriate to the knowledge level of the inexperienced firewall
user.Since all firewalls are based on interrogating the values of
selected packet control fields, the creator of the firewall
rules must have an understanding of how
TCP/IP works, what the different values in
the packet control fields are and how these values are used in a
normal session conversation. For a good explanation go to:
.The Packet Filter (PF) FirewallfirewallPFAs of July 2003 the OpenBSD firewall software application
known as PF was ported to &os; and was made
available in the &os; Ports Collection; the first release that
contained PF as an integrated part of the
base system was &os; 5.3 in November 2004.
PF is a complete, fully featured firewall
that contains ALTQ for bandwidth usage
management in a way similar to what DUMMYNET provides in
IPFW. The OpenBSD project does an
outstanding job of maintaining the PF users' guide that it will
not be made part of this handbook firewall section as that would
just be duplicated effort.The availability of PF for the various &os; releases and versions is
summarized below:&os; VersionPF AvailabilityPre-4.X versionsPF is not available for any release of &os; older than the
4.X branch.All versions of the 4.X branchPF is available as part of KAME.5.X releases before 5.3-RELEASEThe security/pf
port can be used to install PF on these versions of &os;.
These releases were targeted to developers and people who
wanted a preview of early 5.X versions. Upgrading to
5.3-RELEASE or newer versions of &os; is strongly
recommended.5.3-RELEASE and later versionsPF is part of the base system.
Do not use the
security/pf port
on these versions of &os;. It will not work.
Use the &man.pf.4; support of the base system instead.More info can be found at the PF for &os; web site: .The OpenBSD PF user's guide is here: .PF in &os; 5.X is at the level of OpenBSD version 3.5. The
port from the &os; Ports Collection is at the level of OpenBSD
version 3.4. Keep that in mind when browsing the user's
guide.Enabling PFPF is included in the basic &os; install for versions newer than
5.3 as a separate run time loadable module. The system will dynamically load
the PF kernel loadable module when the rc.conf statement
pf_enable="YES" is used. The
loadable module was created with &man.pflog.4; logging
enabled.Kernel optionskernel optionsdevice pfkernel optionsdevice pflogkernel optionsdevice pfsyncIt is not a mandatory requirement that you enable PF by
compiling the following options into the &os; kernel. It is only
presented here as background information. Compiling PF into the
kernel causes the loadable module to never be used.Sample kernel config PF option statements are in the
/usr/src/sys/conf/NOTES kernel source and are
reproduced here:device pf
device pflog
device pfsyncdevice pf enables support for the
Packet Filter firewall.device pflog enables the optional
&man.pflog.4; pseudo network device which can be used to log traffic
to a &man.bpf.4; descriptor. The &man.pflogd.8; daemon can be used to
store the logging information to disk.device pfsync enables the optional
&man.pfsync.4; pseudo network device that is used to monitor
state changes. As this is not part of the loadable
module one has to build a custom kernel to use it.These settings will take effect only after you have built and
installed a kernel with them set.Available rc.conf OptionsYou need the following statements in /etc/rc.conf
to activate PF at boot time:pf_enable="YES" # Enable PF (load module if required)
pf_rules="/etc/pf.conf" # rules definition file for pf
pf_flags="" # additional flags for pfctl startup
pflog_enable="YES" # start pflogd(8)
pflog_logfile="/var/log/pflog" # where pflogd should store the logfile
pflog_flags="" # additional flags for pflogd startupIf you have a LAN behind this firewall and have to forward
packets for the computers in the LAN or want to do NAT, you have to
enable the following option as well:gateway_enable="YES" # Enable as Lan gatewayThe IPFILTER (IPF) FirewallfirewallIPFILTERThe author of IPFILTER is Darren Reed. IPFILTER is not
operating system dependent: it is an open source
application and has been ported to &os;, NetBSD, OpenBSD, SunOS,
HP/UX, and Solaris operating systems. IPFILTER is actively being
supported and maintained, with updated versions being released
regularly.IPFILTER is based on a kernel-side firewall and
NAT mechanism that can be controlled and
monitored by userland interface programs. The firewall rules can
be set or deleted with the &man.ipf.8; utility. The
NAT rules can be set or deleted with the
&man.ipnat.1; utility. The &man.ipfstat.8; utility can print
run-time statistics for the kernel parts of IPFILTER. The
&man.ipmon.8; program can log IPFILTER actions to the system log
files.IPF was originally written using a rule processing logic of
the last matching rule wins and used only
stateless type of rules. Over time IPF has been enhanced to
include a quick option and a stateful keep
state option which drastically modernized the rules
processing logic. IPF's official documentation covers the legacy
rule coding parameters and the legacy rule file processing
logic. The modernized functions are only included as additional
options, completely understating their benefits in producing a
far superior secure firewall.The instructions contained in this section are based on
using rules that contain the quick option and the
stateful keep state option. This is the basic
framework for coding an inclusive firewall rule set.An inclusive firewall only allows packets matching the rules
to pass through. This way you can control what services can
originate behind the firewall destined for the public Internet
and also control the services which can originate from the
public Internet accessing your private network. Everything else
is blocked and logged by default design. Inclusive firewalls are
much, much more secure than exclusive firewall rule sets and is
the only rule set type covered herein.For detailed explanation of the legacy rules processing
method see:
and .The IPF FAQ is at .Enabling IPFIPFILTERenablingIPF is included in the basic &os; install as a separate
run time loadable module. The system will dynamically load the IPF kernel
loadable module when the rc.conf statement
ipfilter_enable="YES" is used. The loadable
module was created with logging enabled and the default
pass all options. You do not need to compile IPF into
the &os; kernel just to change the default to block
all, you can do that by just coding a block all rule at
the end of your rule set.Kernel optionskernel optionsIPFILTERkernel optionsIPFILTER_LOGkernel optionsIPFILTER_DEFAULT_BLOCKIPFILTERkernel optionsIt is not a mandatory requirement that you enable IPF by
compiling the following options into the &os; kernel. It is
only presented here as background information. Compiling IPF
into the kernel causes the loadable module to never be used.
Sample kernel config IPF option statements are in the
/usr/src/sys/conf/NOTES kernel source
(/usr/src/sys/arch/conf/LINT
for &os; 4.X) and are reproduced here:options IPFILTER
options IPFILTER_LOG
options IPFILTER_DEFAULT_BLOCKoptions IPFILTER enables support for the
IPFILTER firewall.options IPFILTER_LOG enables the
option to have IPF log traffic by writing to the ipl packet
logging pseudo—device for every rule that has the log
keyword.options IPFILTER_DEFAULT_BLOCK
changes the default behavior so any packet not matching a
firewall pass rule gets blocked.These settings will take effect only after you have built
and installed a kernel with them set.Available rc.conf OptionsYou need the following statements in /etc/rc.conf
to activate IPF at boot time:ipfilter_enable="YES" # Start ipf firewall
ipfilter_rules="/etc/ipf.rules" # loads rules definition text file
ipmon_enable="YES" # Start IP monitor log
ipmon_flags="-Ds" # D = start as daemon
# s = log to syslog
# v = log tcp window, ack, seq
# n = map IP & port to namesIf you have a LAN behind this firewall that uses the
reserved private IP address ranges, then you need to add the
following to enable NAT functionality:gateway_enable="YES" # Enable as Lan gateway
ipnat_enable="YES" # Start ipnat function
ipnat_rules="/etc/ipnat.rules" # rules definition file for ipnatIPFipfThe ipf command is used to load your rules file. Normally
you create a file containing your custom rules and use this
command to replace in mass the currently running firewall
internal rules:&prompt.root; ipf -Fa -f /etc/ipf.rules means flush all internal rules tables. means this is the file to read for the rules to load.This gives you the ability to make changes to your custom
rules file, run the above IPF command, and thus update the running
firewall with a fresh copy of all the rules without having to
reboot the system. This method is very convenient for testing new
rules as the procedure can be executed as many times as needed.
See the &man.ipf.8; manual page for details on the other flags
available with this command.The &man.ipf.8; command expects the rules file to be a
standard text file. It will not accept a rules file written as a
script with symbolic substitution.There is a way to build IPF rules that utilizes the power of
script symbolic substitution. For more information, see .IPFSTATipfstatIPFILTERstatisticsThe default behavior of &man.ipfstat.8; is to retrieve and
display the totals of the accumulated statistics gathered as a
result of applying the user coded rules against packets going
in and out of the firewall since it was last started, or since
the last time the accumulators were reset to zero by the
ipf -Z command.See the &man.ipfstat.8; manual page for details.The default &man.ipfstat.8; command output will look
something like this:input packets: blocked 99286 passed 1255609 nomatch 14686 counted 0
output packets: blocked 4200 passed 1284345 nomatch 14687 counted 0
input packets logged: blocked 99286 passed 0
output packets logged: blocked 0 passed 0
packets logged: input 0 output 0
log failures: input 3898 output 0
fragment state(in): kept 0 lost 0
fragment state(out): kept 0 lost 0
packet state(in): kept 169364 lost 0
packet state(out): kept 431395 lost 0
ICMP replies: 0 TCP RSTs sent: 0
Result cache hits(in): 1215208 (out): 1098963
IN Pullups succeeded: 2 failed: 0
OUT Pullups succeeded: 0 failed: 0
Fastroute successes: 0 failures: 0
TCP cksum fails(in): 0 (out): 0
Packet log flags set: (0)When supplied with either for inbound
or for outbound,
it will retrieve and display the appropriate list of filter
rules currently installed and in use by the kernel.ipfstat -in displays the inbound internal
rules table with rule number.ipfstat -on displays the outbound
internal rules table with the rule number.The output will look something like this:@1 pass out on xl0 from any to any
@2 block out on dc0 from any to any
@3 pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp/udp from any to any keep stateipfstat -ih displays the inbound internal
rules table, prefixing each rule with a count of how many times the
rule was matched.ipfstat -oh displays the outbound
internal rules table, prefixing each rule with a count of how many
times the rule was matched.The output will look something like this:2451423 pass out on xl0 from any to any
354727 block out on dc0 from any to any
430918 pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp/udp from any to any keep stateOne of the most important functions of the
ipfstat command is the
flag which displays the state table in a way
similar to the way &man.top.1; shows the &os; running process
table. When your firewall is under attack this function gives
you the ability to identify, drill down to, and see the
attacking packets. The optional sub-flags give the ability to
select the destination or source IP, port, or protocol that you want to
monitor in real time. See the &man.ipfstat.8; manual page for
details.IPMONipmonIPFILTERloggingIn order for ipmon to work properly, the
kernel option IPFILTER_LOG must be turned on. This command has
two different modes that it can be used in. Native mode is the default
mode when you type the command on the command line without the
flag.Daemon mode is for when you want to have a continuous
system log file available so that you can review logging of past
events. This is how &os; and IPFILTER are configured to work
together. &os; has a built in facility to automatically
rotate system logs. That is why outputting the log information to
syslogd is better than the default of outputting to a regular
file. In the default rc.conf file you see the
ipmon_flags statement uses the flags:ipmon_flags="-Ds" # D = start as daemon
# s = log to syslog
# v = log tcp window, ack, seq
# n = map IP & port to namesThe benefits of logging are obvious. It provides the
ability to review, after the fact, information such as which
packets had been dropped, what addresses they came from and
where they were going. These all give you a significant edge in
tracking down attackers.Even with the logging facility enabled, IPF will not
generate any rule logging on its own. The firewall
administrator decides what rules in the rule set he wants to
log and adds the log keyword to those rules. Normally only
deny rules are logged.It is very customary to include a default deny everything
rule with the log keyword included as your last rule in the
rule set. This way you get to see all the packets that did not
match any of the rules in the rule set.IPMON LoggingSyslogd uses its own special method for segregation of log
data. It uses special groupings called facility
and level. IPMON in mode uses local0 as the
facility name. All IPMON logged data goes to
local0. The following levels can be used to further segregate
the logged data if desired:LOG_INFO - packets logged using the "log" keyword as the action rather than pass or block.
LOG_NOTICE - packets logged which are also passed
LOG_WARNING - packets logged which are also blocked
LOG_ERR - packets which have been logged and which can be considered shortTo setup IPFILTER to log all data to
/var/log/ipfilter.log, you will need to create the
file. The following command will do that:&prompt.root; touch /var/log/ipfilter.logThe syslog function is controlled by definition statements
in the /etc/syslog.conf file. The syslog.conf file offers
considerable flexibility in how syslog will deal with system
messages issued by software applications like IPF.Add the following statement to /etc/syslog.conf:local0.* /var/log/ipfilter.logThe local0.* means to write all the logged messages to the
coded file location.To activate the changes to /etc/syslog.conf
you can reboot or bump the syslog task into
re-reading /etc/syslog.conf by running
/etc/rc.d/syslogd reload
(killall -HUP syslogd in &os; 4.X).Do not forget to change /etc/newsyslog.conf
to rotate the new log you just created above.
The Format of Logged MessagesMessages generated by ipmon consist of data fields
separated by white space. Fields common to all messages are:
The date of packet receipt.The time of packet receipt. This is in the form
HH:MM:SS.F, for hours, minutes, seconds, and fractions of a
second (which can be several digits long).The name of the interface the packet was processed on,
e.g. dc0.The group and rule number of the rule, e.g. @0:17.
These can be viewed with ipfstat -in.The action: p for passed, b for blocked, S for a short
packet, n did not match any rules, L for a log rule. The
order of precedence in showing flags is: S, p, b, n, L. A
capital P or B means that the packet has been logged due to
a global logging setting, not a particular rule.The addresses. This is actually three fields: the
source address and port (separated by a comma), the ->
symbol, and the destination address and port.
209.53.17.22,80 -> 198.73.220.17,1722.PR followed by the protocol name or number, e.g. PR
tcp.len followed by the header length and total length of
the packet, e.g. len 20 40.If the packet is a TCP packet, there will be an additional
field starting with a hyphen followed by letters corresponding
to any flags that were set. See the &man.ipmon.8; manual page
for a list of letters and their flags.If the packet is an ICMP packet, there will be two fields
at the end, the first always being ICMP, and
the next being the ICMP message and sub-message type,
separated by a slash, e.g. ICMP 3/3 for a port unreachable
message.Building the Rule Script with Symbolic SubstitutionSome experienced IPF users create a file containing the
rules and code them in a manner compatible with running them
as a script with symbolic substitution. The major benefit of
doing this is that you only have to change the value associated
with the symbolic name and when the script is run all the rules
containing the symbolic name will have the value substituted in
the rules. Being a script, you can use symbolic substitution to
code frequently used values and substitute them in multiple
rules. You will see this in the following example.The script syntax used here is compatible with the sh, csh,
and tcsh shells.Symbolic substitution fields are prefixed with a dollar
sign: $.Symbolic fields do not have the $ prefix.The value to populate the symbolic field must be enclosed
with double quotes (").Start your rule file with something like this:############# Start of IPF rules script ########################
oif="dc0" # name of the outbound interface
odns="192.0.2.11" # ISP's DNS server IP address
myip="192.0.2.7" # my static IP address from ISP
ks="keep state"
fks="flags S keep state"
# You can choose between building /etc/ipf.rules file
# from this script or running this script "as is".
#
# Uncomment only one line and comment out another.
#
# 1) This can be used for building /etc/ipf.rules:
#cat > /etc/ipf.rules << EOF
#
# 2) This can be used to run script "as is":
/sbin/ipf -Fa -f - << EOF
# Allow out access to my ISP's Domain name server.
pass out quick on $oif proto tcp from any to $odns port = 53 $fks
pass out quick on $oif proto udp from any to $odns port = 53 $ks
# Allow out non-secure standard www function
pass out quick on $oif proto tcp from $myip to any port = 80 $fks
# Allow out secure www function https over TLS SSL
pass out quick on $oif proto tcp from $myip to any port = 443 $fks
EOF
################## End of IPF rules script ########################That is all there is to it. The rules are not important in
this example; how the symbolic substitution fields are populated
and used are. If the above example was in a file named /etc/ipf.rules.script,
you could reload these rules by entering the following
command:&prompt.root; sh /etc/ipf.rules.scriptThere is one problem with using a rules file with embedded
symbolics: IPF does not understand symbolic substitution, and
cannot read such scripts directly.This script can be used in one of two ways:Uncomment the line that begins with cat,
and comment out the line that begins with
/sbin/ipf. Place
ipfilter_enable="YES" into
/etc/rc.conf as usual, and run
script once after each modification to create or update
/etc/ipf.rules.Disable IPFILTER in system startup scripts by
adding ipfilter_enable="NO" (this is
default value) into
/etc/rc.conf file.Add a script like the following to your
/usr/local/etc/rc.d/ startup
directory. The script should have an obvious name like
ipf.loadrules.sh.
The .sh extension is mandatory.#!/bin/sh
sh /etc/ipf.rules.scriptThe permissions on this script file must be read, write,
execute for owner root.&prompt.root; chmod 700 /usr/local/etc/rc.d/ipf.loadrules.shNow, when your system boots, your IPF rules will be
loaded.IPF Rule SetsA rule set is a group of ipf rules coded to pass or block
packets based on the values contained in the packet. The
bi-directional exchange of packets between hosts comprises a
session conversation. The firewall rule set processes the
packet two times, once on its arrival from the public Internet
host and again as it leaves for its return trip back to the
public Internet host. Each TCP/IP service (i.e. telnet, www,
mail, etc.) is predefined by its protocol, source and
destination IP address, or the source and destination port
number. This is the basic selection criteria used to create
rules which will pass or block services.IPFILTERrule processing orderIPF was originally written using a rules processing logic
of the last matching rule wins and used only stateless
rules. Over time IPF has been enhanced to include a quick
option and a stateful keep state option which drastically
modernized the rule processing logic.The instructions contained in this section are based on
using rules that contain the quick option and the stateful
keep state option. This is the basic framework for coding an
inclusive firewall rule set.An inclusive firewall only allows services matching the
rules through. This way you can control what services can
originate behind the firewall destined for the public Internet
and also control the services which can originate from the
public Internet accessing your private network. Everything
else is blocked and logged by default design. Inclusive
firewalls are much, much securer than exclusive firewall rule
sets and is the only rule set type covered herein.When working with the firewall rules, be
very careful. Some configurations
will lock you out of the server.
To be on the safe side, you may wish to consider performing
the initial firewall configuration from the local console
rather than doing it remotely e.g. via
ssh.Rule SyntaxIPFILTERrule syntaxThe rule syntax presented here has been simplified to only
address the modern stateful rule context and first matching
rule wins logic. For the complete legacy rule syntax
description see the &man.ipf.8; manual page.A # character is used to mark the
start of a comment and may appear at
the end of a rule line or on its own line. Blank lines are
ignored.Rules contain keywords. These keywords have to be coded in
a specific order from left to right on the line. Keywords are
identified in bold type. Some keywords have sub-options which
may be keywords themselves and also include more sub-options.
Each of the headings in the below syntax has a bold section
header which expands on the content.ACTION IN-OUT OPTIONS SELECTION STATEFUL
PROTO SRC_ADDR,DST_ADDR OBJECT PORT_NUM TCP_FLAG STATEFUL
ACTION = block | passIN-OUT = in | outOPTIONS = log | quick | on
interface-nameSELECTION = proto value |
source/destination IP | port = number | flags flag-valuePROTO = tcp/udp | udp | tcp |
icmpSRC_ADD,DST_ADDR = all | from
object to objectOBJECT = IP address | anyPORT_NUM = port numberTCP_FLAG = SSTATEFUL = keep stateACTIONThe action indicates what to do with the packet if it
matches the rest of the filter rule. Each rule must have a
action. The following actions are recognized:block indicates that the packet should be dropped if
the selection parameters match the packet.pass indicates that the packet should exit the firewall
if the selection parameters match the packet.IN-OUTA mandatory requirement is that each filter rule
explicitly state which side of the I/O it is to be used on.
The next keyword must be either in or out and one or the
other has to be coded or the rule will not pass syntax
checks.in means this rule is being applied against an inbound
packet which has just been received on the interface
facing the public Internet.out means this rule is being applied against an
outbound packet destined for the interface facing the public
Internet.OPTIONSThese options must be used in the order shown here.
log indicates that the packet header will be written to
the ipl log (as described in the LOGGING section below) if
the selection parameters match the packet.quick indicates that if the selection parameters match
the packet, this rule will be the last rule checked,
allowing a "short-circuit" path to avoid processing any
following rules for this packet. This option is a mandatory
requirement for the modernized rules processing logic.
on indicates the interface name to be incorporated into
the selection parameters. Interface names are as displayed
by &man.ifconfig.8;. Using this option, the rule will only match if
the packet is going through that interface in the specified
direction (in/out). This option is a mandatory requirement
for the modernized rules processing logic.When a packet is logged, the headers of the packet are
written to the IPL packet logging pseudo-device.
Immediately following the log keyword, the following
qualifiers may be used (in this order):body indicates that the first 128 bytes of the packet
contents will be logged after the headers.first If the log keyword is being used in conjunction
with a keep state option, it is recommended that this
option is also applied so that only the triggering packet
is logged and not every packet which thereafter matches
the keep state information.SELECTIONThe keywords described in this section are used to
describe attributes of the packet to be interrogated when
determining whether rules match or not. There is a
keyword subject, and it has sub-option keywords, one of
which has to be selected. The following general-purpose
attributes are provided for matching, and must be used in
this order:PROTOproto is the subject keyword and must be coded along
with one of its corresponding keyword sub-option values.
The value allows a specific protocol to be matched against.
This option is a mandatory requirement for the modernized
rules processing logic.tcp/udp | udp | tcp | icmp or any protocol names found
in /etc/protocols are recognized and may be used. The
special protocol keyword tcp/udp may be used to match
either a TCP or a UDP packet, and has been added as a
convenience to save duplication of otherwise identical
rules.SRC_ADDR/DST_ADDRThe all keyword is essentially a synonym for from
any to any with no other match parameters.from src to dst: the from and to keywords are used to
match against IP addresses. Rules must specify BOTH source
and destination parameters. any is a special keyword that
matches any IP address. Examples of use: from any to any or from
0.0.0.0/0 to any or from any to 0.0.0.0/0 or from
0.0.0.0 to any or from any to 0.0.0.0.IP addresses may be specified as a dotted IP address
numeric form/mask-length, or as single dotted IP address
numeric form.There is no way to match ranges of IP addresses which
do not express themselves easily as mask-length. See this
web page for help on writing mask-length:
.PORTIf a port match is included, for either or both of
source and destination, then it is only applied to TCP and
UDP packets. When composing port comparisons, either the
service name from /etc/services or an integer port number
may be used. When the port appears as part of the from
object, it matches the source port number; when it appears
as part of the to object, it matches the destination port
number. The use of the port option with the to object is
a mandatory requirement for the modernized rules processing
logic. Example of use: from any to any port = 80Port comparisons may be done in a number of forms, with
a number of comparison operators, or port ranges may be
specified.port "=" | "!=" | "<" | ">" | "<=" | ">=" | "eq" | "ne"
| "lt" | "gt" | "le" | "ge".To specify port ranges, port "<>" | "><"Following the source and destination matching
parameters, the following two parameters are mandatory
requirements for the modernized rules processing logic.
TCP_FLAGFlags are only effective for TCP filtering. The letters
represents one of the possible flags that can be
interrogated in the TCP packet header.The modernized rules processing logic uses the flags
S parameter to identify the tcp session start request.
STATEFULkeep state indicates that on a pass rule, any packets
that match the rules selection parameters should activate
the stateful filtering facility.This option is a mandatory requirement for the
modernized rules processing logic.Stateful FilteringIPFILTERstateful filteringStateful filtering treats traffic as a bi-directional
exchange of packets comprising a session conversation. When
activated, keep-state dynamically generates internal rules for
each anticipated packet being exchanged during the
bi-directional session conversation. It has the interrogation
abilities to determine if the session conversation between the
originating sender and the destination are following the valid
procedure of bi-directional packet exchange. Any packets that
do not properly fit the session conversation template are
automatically rejected as impostors.Keep state will also allow ICMP packets related to a TCP
or UDP session through. So if you get ICMP type 3 code 4 in
response to some web surfing allowed out by a keep state rule,
they will be automatically allowed in. Any packet that IPF can
be certain is part of an active session, even if it is a
different protocol, will be let in.What happens is:Packets destined to go out the interface connected to the
public Internet are first checked against the dynamic state
table, if the packet matches the next expected packet
comprising in a active session conversation, then it exits
the firewall and the state of the session conversation flow
is updated in the dynamic state table, the remaining packets
get checked against the outbound rule set.Packets coming in to the interface connected to the public
Internet are first checked against the dynamic state table, if
the packet matches the next expected packet comprising a
active session conversation, then it exits the firewall and
the state of the session conversation flow is updated in the
dynamic state table, the remaining packets get checked against
the inbound rule set.When the conversation completes it is removed from the
dynamic state table.Stateful filtering allows you to focus on blocking/passing
new sessions. If the new session is passed, all its subsequent
packets will be allowed through automatically and any
impostors automatically rejected. If a new session is blocked,
none of its subsequent packets will be allowed through.
Stateful filtering has technically advanced interrogation
abilities capable of defending against the flood of different
attack methods currently employed by attackers.Inclusive Rule Set ExampleThe following rule set is an example of how to code a very
secure inclusive type of firewall. An inclusive firewall only
allows services matching pass rules through and blocks all
other by default. All firewalls have at the minimum two
interfaces which have to have rules to allow the firewall to
function.All &unix; flavored systems including &os; are designed to
use interface lo0 and IP address 127.0.0.1 for internal
communication within the operating system. The firewall
rules must contain rules to allow free unmolested movement of
these special internally used packets.The interface which faces the public Internet is the one
where you place your rules to authorize and control access out
to the public Internet and access requests arriving from the
public Internet. This can be your user PPP tun0 interface or
your NIC that is connected to your DSL or cable modem.In cases where one or more NICs are cabled to
private LANs behind the firewall, those
interfaces must have a rule coded to allow free unmolested
movement of packets originating from those LAN interfaces.The rules should be first organized into three major
sections: all the free unmolested interfaces, the public interface
outbound, and the public interface inbound.The rules in each of the public interface
sections should have the most frequently matched rules
placed before less commonly matched rules, with the last rule in the
section blocking and logging all packets on that interface and
direction.The Outbound section in the following rule set only
contains 'pass' rules which contain selection values that
uniquely identify the service that is authorized for public
Internet access. All the rules have the 'quick', 'on',
'proto', 'port', and 'keep state' option coded. The 'proto
tcp' rules have the 'flag' option included to identify the
session start request as the triggering packet to activate the
stateful facility.The Inbound section has all the blocking of undesirable
packets first, for two different reasons. The first is that these things
being blocked may be part of an otherwise valid packet which
may be allowed in by the later authorized service rules.
The second reason is that by having a rule that explicitly blocks
selected packets that I receive on an infrequent basis and
that I do not want to see in the log, they will not be
caught by the last rule in the section which blocks and logs
all packets which have fallen through the rules. The last rule
in the section which blocks and logs all packets is how you
create the legal evidence needed to prosecute the people who
are attacking your system.Another thing you should take note of, is there is no
response returned for any of the undesirable stuff, their
packets just get dropped and vanish. This way the attacker
has no knowledge if his packets have reached your system. The
less the attackers can learn about your system the more secure
it is. The inbound 'nmap OS fingerprint' attempts rule I log
the first occurrence because this is something a attacker
would do.Any time you see log messages on a rule with 'log first'.
You should do an ipfstat -hio command to
see the number of times the rule has been matched so you know
if you are being flooded, i.e. under attack.When you log packets with port numbers you do not
recognize, look it up in /etc/services or go to
and do a port number lookup to find what the purpose of that
port number is.Check out this link for port numbers used by Trojans
.The following rule set is a complete very secure
'inclusive' type of firewall rule set that I have used on my
system. You can not go wrong using this rule set for your own.
Just comment out any pass rules for services that you do not want to
authorize.If you see messages in your log that you want to stop
seeing just add a block rule in the inbound section.You have to change the dc0
interface name in every rule to the interface name of the Nic
card that connects your system to the public Internet. For
user PPP it would be tun0.Add the following statements to
/etc/ipf.rules:#################################################################
# No restrictions on Inside LAN Interface for private network
# Not needed unless you have LAN
#################################################################
#pass out quick on xl0 all
#pass in quick on xl0 all
#################################################################
# No restrictions on Loopback Interface
#################################################################
pass in quick on lo0 all
pass out quick on lo0 all
#################################################################
# Interface facing Public Internet (Outbound Section)
# Interrogate session start requests originating from behind the
# firewall on the private network
# or from this gateway server destine for the public Internet.
#################################################################
# Allow out access to my ISP's Domain name server.
# xxx must be the IP address of your ISP's DNS.
# Dup these lines if your ISP has more than one DNS server
# Get the IP addresses from /etc/resolv.conf file
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to xxx port = 53 flags S keep state
pass out quick on dc0 proto udp from any to xxx port = 53 keep state
# Allow out access to my ISP's DHCP server for cable or DSL networks.
# This rule is not needed for 'user ppp' type connection to the
# public Internet, so you can delete this whole group.
# Use the following rule and check log for IP address.
# Then put IP address in commented out rule & delete first rule
pass out log quick on dc0 proto udp from any to any port = 67 keep state
#pass out quick on dc0 proto udp from any to z.z.z.z port = 67 keep state
# Allow out non-secure standard www function
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 80 flags S keep state
# Allow out secure www function https over TLS SSL
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 443 flags S keep state
# Allow out send & get email function
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 110 flags S keep state
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 25 flags S keep state
# Allow out Time
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 37 flags S keep state
# Allow out nntp news
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 119 flags S keep state
# Allow out gateway & LAN users non-secure FTP ( both passive & active modes)
# This function uses the IPNAT built in FTP proxy function coded in
# the nat rules file to make this single rule function correctly.
# If you want to use the pkg_add command to install application packages
# on your gateway system you need this rule.
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 21 flags S keep state
# Allow out secure FTP, Telnet, and SCP
# This function is using SSH (secure shell)
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 22 flags S keep state
# Allow out non-secure Telnet
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 23 flags S keep state
# Allow out FBSD CVSUP function
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 5999 flags S keep state
# Allow out ping to public Internet
pass out quick on dc0 proto icmp from any to any icmp-type 8 keep state
# Allow out whois for LAN PC to public Internet
pass out quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 43 flags S keep state
# Block and log only the first occurrence of everything
# else that's trying to get out.
# This rule enforces the block all by default logic.
block out log first quick on dc0 all
#################################################################
# Interface facing Public Internet (Inbound Section)
# Interrogate packets originating from the public Internet
# destine for this gateway server or the private network.
#################################################################
# Block all inbound traffic from non-routable or reserved address spaces
block in quick on dc0 from 192.168.0.0/16 to any #RFC 1918 private IP
block in quick on dc0 from 172.16.0.0/12 to any #RFC 1918 private IP
block in quick on dc0 from 10.0.0.0/8 to any #RFC 1918 private IP
block in quick on dc0 from 127.0.0.0/8 to any #loopback
block in quick on dc0 from 0.0.0.0/8 to any #loopback
block in quick on dc0 from 169.254.0.0/16 to any #DHCP auto-config
block in quick on dc0 from 192.0.2.0/24 to any #reserved for docs
block in quick on dc0 from 204.152.64.0/23 to any #Sun cluster interconnect
block in quick on dc0 from 224.0.0.0/3 to any #Class D & E multicast
##### Block a bunch of different nasty things. ############
# That I don't want to see in the log
# Block frags
block in quick on dc0 all with frags
# Block short tcp packets
block in quick on dc0 proto tcp all with short
# block source routed packets
block in quick on dc0 all with opt lsrr
block in quick on dc0 all with opt ssrr
# Block nmap OS fingerprint attempts
# Log first occurrence of these so I can get their IP address
block in log first quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any flags FUP
# Block anything with special options
block in quick on dc0 all with ipopts
# Block public pings
block in quick on dc0 proto icmp all icmp-type 8
# Block ident
block in quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 113
# Block all Netbios service. 137=name, 138=datagram, 139=session
# Netbios is MS/Windows sharing services.
# Block MS/Windows hosts2 name server requests 81
block in log first quick on dc0 proto tcp/udp from any to any port = 137
block in log first quick on dc0 proto tcp/udp from any to any port = 138
block in log first quick on dc0 proto tcp/udp from any to any port = 139
block in log first quick on dc0 proto tcp/udp from any to any port = 81
# Allow traffic in from ISP's DHCP server. This rule must contain
# the IP address of your ISP's DHCP server as it's the only
# authorized source to send this packet type. Only necessary for
# cable or DSL configurations. This rule is not needed for
# 'user ppp' type connection to the public Internet.
# This is the same IP address you captured and
# used in the outbound section.
pass in quick on dc0 proto udp from z.z.z.z to any port = 68 keep state
# Allow in standard www function because I have apache server
pass in quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 80 flags S keep state
# Allow in non-secure Telnet session from public Internet
# labeled non-secure because ID/PW passed over public Internet as clear text.
# Delete this sample group if you do not have telnet server enabled.
#pass in quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 23 flags S keep state
# Allow in secure FTP, Telnet, and SCP from public Internet
# This function is using SSH (secure shell)
pass in quick on dc0 proto tcp from any to any port = 22 flags S keep state
# Block and log only first occurrence of all remaining traffic
# coming into the firewall. The logging of only the first
# occurrence stops a .denial of service. attack targeted
# at filling up your log file space.
# This rule enforces the block all by default logic.
block in log first quick on dc0 all
################### End of rules file #####################################
NATNATIP masqueradingNATnetwork address translationNATNAT stands for Network Address
Translation. To those familiar with Linux, this concept is
called IP Masquerading; NAT and IP
Masquerading are the same thing. One of the many things the
IPF NAT function enables is the ability to
have a private Local Area Network (LAN) behind the firewall
sharing a single ISP assigned IP address on the public
Internet.You may ask why would someone want to do this. ISPs normally
assign a dynamic IP address to their non-commercial users.
Dynamic means that the IP address can be different each time you
dial in and log on to your ISP, or for cable and DSL modem
users when you power off and then power on your modems you can
get assigned a different IP address. This IP address is how
you are known to the public Internet.Now lets say you have five PCs at home and each one needs
Internet access. You would have to pay your ISP for an
individual Internet account for each PC and have five phone
lines.With NAT you only need a single account
with your ISP, then cable your other four PCs to a switch and
the switch to the NIC in your &os; system which is going to
service your LAN as a gateway. NAT will
automatically translate the private LAN IP address for each
separate PC on the LAN to the single public IP address as it
exits the firewall bound for the public Internet. It also does
the reverse translation for returning packets.NAT is most often accomplished without
the approval, or knowledge, of your ISP and in most cases is
grounds for your ISP terminating your account if found
out. Commercial users pay a lot more for their Internet
connection and usually get assigned a block of static IP
address which never change. The ISP also expects and consents
to their Commercial customers using NAT for
their internal private LANs.There is a special range of IP addresses reserved for
NATed private LAN IP address. According to
RFC 1918, you can use the following IP ranges for private nets
which will never be routed directly to the public
Internet:Start IP 10.0.0.0-Ending IP 10.255.255.255
Start IP 172.16.0.0-Ending IP 172.31.255.255
Start IP 192.168.0.0-Ending IP 192.168.255.255
IPNATNATand IPFILTERipnatNAT rules are loaded by using the ipnat
command. Typically the NAT rules are stored
in /etc/ipnat.rules. See &man.ipnat.1;
for details.When changing the NAT rules after
NAT has been started, make your changes to
the file containing the NAT rules, then run ipnat command with
the flags to delete the internal in use
NAT rules and flush the contents of the
translation table of all active entries.To reload the NAT rules issue a command
like this:&prompt.root; ipnat -CF -f /etc/ipnat.rulesTo display some statistics about your
NAT, use this command:&prompt.root; ipnat -sTo list the NAT table's current
mappings, use this command:&prompt.root; ipnat -lTo turn verbose mode on, and display information relating
to rule processing and active rules/table entries:&prompt.root; ipnat -vIPNAT RulesNAT rules are very flexible and can
accomplish many different things to fit the needs of
commercial and home users.The rule syntax presented here has been simplified to what
is most commonly used in a non-commercial environment. For a
complete rule syntax description see the &man.ipnat.5; manual
page.The syntax for a NAT rule looks
something like this:map IFLAN_IP_RANGE -> PUBLIC_ADDRESSThe keyword map starts the rule.Replace IF with the external
interface.The LAN_IP_RANGE is what your
internal clients use for IP Addressing, usually this is
something like 192.168.1.0/24.The PUBLIC_ADDRESS can either
be the external IP address or the special keyword 0/32,
which means to use the IP address assigned to
IF.How NAT worksA packet arrives at the firewall from the LAN with a
public destination. It passes through the outbound filter
rules, NAT gets his turn at the packet and
applies its rules top down, first matching rule
wins. NAT tests each of its rules against
the packets interface name and source IP address. When a
packets interface name matches a NAT rule
then the [source IP address, i.e. private Lan IP address] of
the packet is checked to see if it falls within the IP address
range specified to the left of the arrow symbol on the
NAT rule. On a match the packet has its
source IP address rewritten with the public IP address
obtained by the 0/32 keyword. NAT posts a
entry in its internal NAT table so when the
packet returns from the public Internet it can be mapped back
to its original private IP address and then passed to the
filter rules for processing.Enabling IPNATTo enable IPNAT add these statements to
/etc/rc.conf.To enable your machine to route traffic between
interfaces:gateway_enable="YES"To start IPNAT automatically each time:ipnat_enable="YES"To specify where to load the IPNAT
rules from:ipnat_rules="/etc/ipnat.rules"NAT for a very large LANFor networks that have large numbers of PC's on the LAN or
networks with more than a single LAN, the process of funneling
all those private IP addresses into a single public IP address
becomes a resource problem that may cause problems with the same
port numbers being used many times across many
NATed LAN PC's, causing collisions. There
are two ways to relieve this resource problem.Assigning Ports to UseA normal NAT rule would look like:map dc0 192.168.1.0/24 -> 0/32In the above rule the packet's source port is unchanged
as the packet passes through IPNAT. By
adding the portmap keyword you can tell
IPNAT to only use source ports in a
range. For example the following rule will tell
IPNAT to modify the source port to be
within that range:map dc0 192.168.1.0/24 -> 0/32 portmap tcp/udp 20000:60000Additionally we can make things even easier by using the
auto keyword to tell IPNAT to determine
by itself which ports are available to use:map dc0 192.168.1.0/24 -> 0/32 portmap tcp/udp autoUsing a pool of public addressesIn very large LANs there comes a point where there are
just too many LAN addresses to fit into a single public
address. By changing the following rule:map dc0 192.168.1.0/24 -> 204.134.75.1Currently this rule maps all connections through 204.134.75.1. This can be changed to
specify a range:map dc0 192.168.1.0/24 -> 204.134.75.1-10Or a subnet using CIDR notation such as:map dc0 192.168.1.0/24 -> 204.134.75.0/24Port RedirectionA very common practice is to have a web server, email
server, database server and DNS server each segregated to a
different PC on the LAN. In this case the traffic from these
servers still have to be NATed, but there
has to be some way to direct the inbound traffic to the
correct LAN PCs. IPNAT has the redirection
facilities of NAT to solve this problem.
Lets say you have your web server on LAN address 10.0.10.25 and your single public IP
address is 20.20.20.5 you would
code the rule like this:map dc0 20.20.20.5/32 port 80 -> 10.0.10.25 port 80or:map dc0 0/32 port 80 -> 10.0.10.25 port 80or for a LAN DNS Server on LAN address of 10.0.10.33 that needs to receive
public DNS requests:map dc0 20.20.20.5/32 port 53 -> 10.0.10.33 port 53 udpFTP and NATFTP is a dinosaur left over from the time before the
Internet as it is known today, when research universities were
leased lined together and FTP was used to share files among
research Scientists. This was a time when data security was
not a consideration. Over the years the FTP protocol became
buried into the backbone of the emerging Internet and its
username and password being sent in clear text was never
changed to address new security concerns. FTP has two flavors,
it can run in active mode or passive mode. The difference is
in how the data channel is acquired. Passive mode is more
secure as the data channel is acquired be the ordinal ftp
session requester. For a real good explanation of FTP and the
different modes see .IPNAT RulesIPNAT has a special built in FTP
proxy option which can be specified on the
NAT map rule. It can monitor all outbound
packet traffic for FTP active or passive start session
requests and dynamically create temporary filter rules
containing only the port number really in use for the data
channel. This eliminates the security risk FTP normally
exposes the firewall to from having large ranges of high
order port numbers open.This rule will handle all the traffic for the internal
LAN:map dc0 10.0.10.0/29 -> 0/32 proxy port 21 ftp/tcpThis rule handles the FTP traffic from the gateway:map dc0 0.0.0.0/0 -> 0/32 proxy port 21 ftp/tcpThis rule handles all non-FTP traffic from the internal
LAN:map dc0 10.0.10.0/29 -> 0/32The FTP map rule goes before our regular map rule. All
packets are tested against the first rule from the top.
Matches on interface name, then private LAN source IP
address, and then is it a FTP packet. If all that matches
then the special FTP proxy creates temp filter rules to let
the FTP session packets pass in and out, in addition to also
NATing the FTP packets. All LAN packets
that are not FTP do not match the first rule and fall
through to the third rule and are tested, matching on
interface and source IP, then are
NATed.IPNAT FTP Filter RulesOnly one filter rule is needed for FTP if the
NAT FTP proxy is used.Without the FTP Proxy you will need the following three
rules:# Allow out LAN PC client FTP to public Internet
# Active and passive modes
pass out quick on rl0 proto tcp from any to any port = 21 flags S keep state
# Allow out passive mode data channel high order port numbers
pass out quick on rl0 proto tcp from any to any port > 1024 flags S keep state
# Active mode let data channel in from FTP server
pass in quick on rl0 proto tcp from any to any port = 20 flags S keep stateFTP NAT Proxy BugAs of &os; 4.9 which includes IPFILTER version 3.4.31
the FTP proxy works as documented during the FTP session
until the session is told to close. When the close happens
packets returning from the remote FTP server are blocked and
logged coming in on port 21. The NAT
FTP/proxy appears to remove its temp rules prematurely,
before receiving the response from the remote FTP server
acknowledging the close. A problem report was posted to the
IPF mailing list.The solution is to add a filter rule to get rid
of these unwanted log messages or do nothing and ignore FTP
inbound error messages in your log. Most people do not use
outbound FTP too often.block in quick on rl0 proto tcp from any to any port = 21IPFWfirewallIPFWThe IPFIREWALL (IPFW) is a &os; sponsored firewall software
application authored and maintained by &os; volunteer staff
members. It uses the legacy stateless rules and a legacy rule
coding technique to achieve what is referred to as Simple
Stateful logic.The IPFW stateless rule syntax is empowered with technically
sophisticated selection capabilities which far surpasses the
knowledge level of the customary firewall installer. IPFW is
targeted at the professional user or the advanced technical
computer hobbyist who have advanced packet selection
requirements. A high degree of detailed knowledge into how
different protocols use and create their unique packet header
information is necessary before the power of the IPFW rules can
be unleashed. Providing that level of explanation is out of the
scope of this section of the handbook.IPFW is composed of seven components, the primary component is
the kernel firewall filter rule processor and its integrated
packet accounting facility, the logging facility, the 'divert'
rule which triggers the NAT facility, and the
advanced special purpose facilities, the dummynet traffic shaper
facilities, the 'fwd rule' forward facility, the bridge
facility, and the ipstealth facility.Enabling IPFWIPFWenablingIPFW is included in the basic &os; install as a separate
run time loadable module. The system will dynamically load the
kernel module when the rc.conf statement
firewall_enable="YES" is used. You do not
need to compile IPFW into the &os; kernel unless you want
NAT function enabled.After rebooting your system with
firewall_enable="YES" in
rc.conf the following white highlighted
message is displayed on the screen as part of the boot
process:IP packet filtering initialized, divert disabled,
rule-based forwarding enabled, default to deny, logging
disabledYou can disregard this message as it is out dated and no
longer is the true status of the IPFW loadable module. The
loadable module really does have logging ability compiled in.To set the verbose logging limit, There is a knob you can
set in /etc/sysctl.conf by adding this
statement, logging will be enabled on future reboots.net.inet.ip.fw.verbose_limit=5Kernel Optionskernel optionsIPFIREWALLkernel optionsIPFIREWALL_VERBOSEkernel optionsIPFIREWALL_VERBOSE_LIMITIPFWkernel optionsIt is not a mandatory requirement that you enable IPFW by
compiling the following options into the &os; kernel unless
you need NAT function. It is presented here
as background information.options IPFIREWALLThis option enables IPFW as part of the kerneloptions IPFIREWALL_VERBOSEEnables logging of packets that pass through IPFW and have
the 'log' keyword specified in the rule set.options IPFIREWALL_VERBOSE_LIMIT=5This specifies the default number of packets from a
particular rule is to be logged. Without this option, each
repeated occurrences of the same packet will be logged, and
eventually consuming all the free disk space resulting in
services being denied do to lack of resources. The number 5 is the
number of consecutive times to log evidence of this unique
occurrence.kernel optionsIPFIREWALL_DEFAULT_TO_ACCEPToptions IPFIREWALL_DEFAULT_TO_ACCEPTThis option will allow everything to pass through the
firewall by default, which is a good idea when you are first
setting up your firewall.options IPV6FIREWALL
options IPV6FIREWALL_VERBOSE
options IPV6FIREWALL_VERBOSE_LIMIT
options IPV6FIREWALL_DEFAULT_TO_ACCEPTThese options are exactly the same as the IPv4 options but
they are for IPv6. If you do not use IPv6 you might want to use
IPV6FIREWALL without any rules to block all IPv6kernel optionsIPDIVERToptions IPDIVERTThis enables the use of NAT
functionality.If you do not include IPFIREWALL_DEFAULT_TO_ACCEPT or set
your rules to allow incoming packets you will block all
packets going to and from this machine./etc/rc.conf OptionsIf you do not have IPFW compiled into your kernel you will
need to load it with the following statement in your
/etc/rc.conf:firewall_enable="YES"Set the script to run to activate your rules:firewall_script="/etc/ipfw.rules"Enable logging:firewall_logging="YES"The IPFW CommandipfwThe ipfw command is the normal vehicle for making manual
single rule additions or deletions to the firewall active
internal rules while it is running. The problem with using
this method is once your system is shutdown or halted all the
rules you added or changed or deleted are lost. Writing all
your rules in a file and using that file to load the rules at
boot time, or to replace in mass the currently running
firewall rules with changes you made to the files content is
the recommended method used here.The ipfw command is still a very useful to display the
running firewall rules to the console screen. The IPFW
accounting facility dynamically creates a counter for each
rule that counts each packet that matches the rule. During the
process of testing a rule, listing the rule with its counter
is the only way of determining if the rule is functioning.To list all the rules in sequence:&prompt.root; ipfw listTo list all the rules with a time stamp of when the last
time the rule was matched:&prompt.root; ipfw -t listTo list the accounting information, packet count for
matched rules along with the rules themselves. The first
column is the rule number, followed by the number of outgoing
matched packets, followed by the number of incoming matched
packets, and then the rule itself.&prompt.root; ipfw -a listList the dynamic rules in addition to the static
rules:&prompt.root; ipfw -d listAlso show the expired dynamic rules:&prompt.root; ipfw -d -e listZero the counters:&prompt.root; ipfw zeroZero the counters for just rule NUM
:&prompt.root; ipfw zero NUMIPFW Rule SetsA rule set is a group of ipfw rules coded to allow or deny
packets based on the values contained in the packet. The
bi-directional exchange of packets between hosts comprises a
session conversation. The firewall rule set processes the
packet twice: once on its arrival from the public Internet
host and again as it leaves for its return trip back to the
public Internet host. Each tcp/ip service (i.e. telnet, www,
mail, etc.) is predefined by its protocol, and port number.
This is the basic selection criteria used to create rules
which will allow or deny services.IPFWrule processing orderWhen a packet enters the firewall it is compared against
the first rule in the rule set and progress one rule at a time
moving from top to bottom of the set in ascending rule number
sequence order. When the packet matches a rule selection
parameters, the rules action field value is executed and the
search of the rule set terminates for that packet. This is
referred to as the first match wins search method. If the
packet does not match any of the rules, it gets caught by the
mandatory ipfw default rule, number 65535 which denies all
packets and discards them without any reply back to the
originating destination.The instructions contained here are based on using rules
that contain the stateful 'keep state', 'limit', 'in'/'out',
and via options. This is the basic framework for coding an
inclusive type firewall rule set.An inclusive firewall only allows services matching the
rules through. This way you can control what services can
originate behind the firewall destine for the public Internet
and also control the services which can originate from the
public Internet accessing your private network. Everything
else is denied by default design. Inclusive firewalls are
much, much more secure than exclusive firewall rule sets and
is the only rule set type covered here in.When working with the firewall rules be careful, you can
end up locking your self out.Rule SyntaxIPFWrule syntaxThe rule syntax presented here has been simplified to
what is necessary to create a standard inclusive type
firewall rule set. For a complete rule syntax description
see the &man.ipfw.8; manual page.Rules contain keywords: these keywords have to be coded
in a specific order from left to right on the line. Keywords
are identified in bold type. Some keywords have sub-options
which may be keywords them selves and also include more
sub-options.# is used to mark the start of a
comment and may appear at the end of a rule line or on its
own lines. Blank lines are ignored.CMD RULE# ACTION LOGGING SELECTION
STATEFULCMDEach rule has to be prefixed with 'add' to add the
rule to the internal table.RULE#Each rule has to have a rule number to go with it.ACTIONA rule can be associated with one of the following
actions, which will be executed when the packet matches
the selection criterion of the rule.allow | accept | pass |
permitThese all mean the same thing which is to allow
packets that match the rule to exit the firewall rule
processing. The search terminates at this rule.check-stateChecks the packet against the dynamic rules table. If
a match is found, execute the action associated with the
rule which generated this dynamic rule, otherwise move to
the next rule. The check-state rule does not have
selection criterion. If no check-state rule is present in
the rule set, the dynamic rules table is checked at the
first keep-state or limit rule.deny | dropBoth words mean the same thing which is to discard
packets that match this rule. The search terminates.Logginglog or
logamountWhen a packet matches a rule with the log keyword, a
message will be logged to syslogd with a facility name of
SECURITY. The logging only occurs if the number of
packets logged so far for that particular rule does not
exceed the logamount parameter. If no logamount is
specified, the limit is taken from the sysctl variable
net.inet.ip.fw.verbose_limit. In both cases, a value of
zero removes the logging limit. Once the limit is
reached, logging can be re-enabled by clearing the
logging counter or the packet counter for that rule, see
the ipfw reset log command. Note: logging is done after
all other packet matching conditions have been
successfully verified, and before performing the final
action (accept, deny) on the packet. It is up to you to
decide which rules you want to enable logging on.SelectionThe keywords described in this section are used to
describe attributes of the packet to be interrogated when
determining whether rules match the packet or not.
The following general-purpose attributes are provided for
matching, and must be used in this order:udp | tcp | icmpor any protocol names found in /etc/protocols are
recognized and may be used. The value specified is
protocol to be matched against. This is a mandatory
requirement.from src to dstThe from and to keywords are used to match against IP
addresses. Rules must specify BOTH source and destination
parameters. any is a special keyword that matches any IP
address. me is a special keyword that matches any IP
address configured on an interface in your &os; system to
represent the PC the firewall is running on (i.e. this
box) as in 'from me to any' or 'from any to me' or 'from
0.0.0.0/0 to any' or 'from any to 0.0.0.0/0' or 'from 0.0.0.0
to any' or 'from any to 0.0.0.0' or 'from me to 0.0.0.0'. IP
addresses are specified as a dotted IP address numeric
form/mask-length, or as single dotted IP address numeric
form. This is a mandatory requirement. See this link for
help on writing mask-lengths. port numberFor protocols which support port numbers (such as
TCP and UDP). It is mandatory that you
code the port number of the service you want to match
on. Service names (from
/etc/services) may be used instead of
numeric port values.in | outMatches incoming or outgoing packets,
respectively. The in and out are keywords and it is
mandatory that you code one or the other as part of your
rule matching criterion.via IFMatches packets going through the interface specified
by exact name. The via keyword causes the interface to
always be checked as part of the match process.setupThis is a mandatory keyword that identifies the
session start request for TCP
packets.keep-stateThis is a mandatory> keyword. Upon a match, the
firewall will create a dynamic rule, whose default
behavior is to match bidirectional traffic between source
and destination IP/port using the same protocol.limit {src-addr | src-port | dst-addr |
dst-port}The firewall will only allow
N connections with the same set
of parameters as specified in the rule. One or more of
source and destination addresses and ports can be
specified. The 'limit' and 'keep-state' can not be used on
same rule. Limit provides the same stateful function as
'keep-state' plus its own functions.Stateful Rule OptionIPFWstateful filteringStateful filtering treats traffic as a bi-directional
exchange of packets comprising a session conversation. It
has the interrogation abilities to determine if the session
conversation between the originating sender and the
destination are following the valid procedure of
bi-directional packet exchange. Any packets that do not
properly fit the session conversation template are
automatically rejected as impostors.'check-state' is used to identify where in the IPFW
rules set the packet is to be tested against the dynamic
rules facility. On a match the packet exits the firewall to
continue on its way and a new rule is dynamic created for
the next anticipated packet being exchanged during this
bi-directional session conversation. On a no match the
packet advances to the next rule in the rule set for
testing.The dynamic rules facility is vulnerable to resource
depletion from a SYN-flood attack which would open a huge
number of dynamic rules. To counter this attack, &os;
version 4.5 added another new option named limit. This
option is used to limit the number of simultaneous session
conversations by interrogating the rules source or
destinations fields as directed by the limit option and
using the packet's IP address found there, in a search of
the open dynamic rules counting the number of times this
rule and IP address combination occurred, if this count is
greater that the value specified on the limit option, the
packet is discarded.Logging Firewall MessagesIPFWloggingThe benefits of logging are obvious: it provides the
ability to review after the fact the rules you activated
logging on which provides information like, what packets had
been dropped, what addresses they came from, where they were
going, giving you a significant edge in tracking down
attackers.Even with the logging facility enabled, IPFW will not
generate any rule logging on it's own. The firewall
administrator decides what rules in the rule set he wants
to log and adds the log verb to those rules. Normally only
deny rules are logged, like the deny rule for incoming
ICMP pings. It is very customary to
duplicate the ipfw default deny everything rule with the
log verb included as your last rule in the rule set. This
way you get to see all the packets that did not match any
of the rules in the rule set.
- Logging is a two edged sword, if you're not careful, you
+ Logging is a two edged sword, if you are not careful, you
can lose yourself in the over abundance of log data and fill
your disk up with growing log files. DoS attacks that fill
up disk drives is one of the oldest attacks around. These
log message are not only written to syslogd, but also are
displayed on the root console screen and soon become very
annoying.The IPFIREWALL_VERBOSE_LIMIT=5
kernel option limits the number of consecutive messages
sent to the system logger syslogd, concerning the packet
matching of a given rule. When this option is enabled in
the kernel, the number of consecutive messages concerning
a particular rule is capped at the number specified. There
is nothing to be gained from 200 log messages saying the
same identical thing. For instance, five consecutive messages
concerning a particular rule would be logged to syslogd,
the remainder identical consecutive messages would be
counted and posted to the syslogd with a phrase like
this:last message repeated 45 timesAll logged packets messages are written by default to
/var/log/security file, which is
defined in the /etc/syslog.conf file.
Building a Rule ScriptMost experienced IPFW users create a file containing the
rules and code them in a manner compatible with running them
as a script. The major benefit of doing this is the firewall
rules can be refreshed in mass without the need of
rebooting the system to activate the new rules. This method
is very convenient in testing new rules as the procedure can
be executed as many times as needed. Being a script, you can
use symbolic substitution to code frequent used values and
substitution them in multiple rules. You will see this in
the following example.The script syntax used here is compatible with the 'sh',
'csh', 'tcsh' shells. Symbolic substitution fields are
prefixed with a dollar sign $. Symbolic fields do not have
the $ prefix. The value to populate the Symbolic field must
be enclosed to "double quotes".Start your rules file like this:############### start of example ipfw rules script #############
#
ipfw -q -f flush # Delete all rules
# Set defaults
oif="tun0" # out interface
odns="192.0.2.11" # ISP's DNS server IP address
cmd="ipfw -q add " # build rule prefix
ks="keep-state" # just too lazy to key this each time
$cmd 00500 check-state
$cmd 00502 deny all from any to any frag
$cmd 00501 deny tcp from any to any established
$cmd 00600 allow tcp from any to any 80 out via $oif setup $ks
$cmd 00610 allow tcp from any to $odns 53 out via $oif setup $ks
$cmd 00611 allow udp from any to $odns 53 out via $oif $ks
################### End of example ipfw rules script ############That is all there is to it. The rules are not important
in this example, how the Symbolic substitution field are
populated and used are.If the above example was in
/etc/ipfw.rules file, you could reload
these rules by entering on the command line.&prompt.root; sh /etc/ipfw.rulesThe /etc/ipfw.rules file could be
located anywhere you want and the file could be named any
thing you would like.The same thing could also be accomplished by running
these commands by hand:&prompt.root; ipfw -q -f flush
&prompt.root; ipfw -q add check-state
&prompt.root; ipfw -q add deny all from any to any frag
&prompt.root; ipfw -q add deny tcp from any to any established
&prompt.root; ipfw -q add allow tcp from any to any 80 out via tun0 setup keep-state
&prompt.root; ipfw -q add allow tcp from any to 192.0.2.11 53 out via tun0 setup keep-state
&prompt.root; ipfw -q add 00611 allow udp from any to 192.0.2.11 53 out via tun0 keep-stateStateful RulesetThe following non-NATed rule set is a example of how to
code a very secure 'inclusive' type of firewall. An
inclusive firewall only allows services matching pass rules
through and blocks all other by default. All firewalls have
at the minimum two interfaces which have to have rules to
allow the firewall to function.All &unix; flavored operating systems, &os; included, are designed to
use interface lo0 and IP address
127.0.0.1 for internal
communication with in the operating system. The firewall rules must contain
rules to allow free unmolested movement of these special
internally used packets.The interface which faces the public Internet, is the
one which you code your rules to authorize and control
access out to the public Internet and access requests
arriving from the public Internet. This can be your ppp tun0
interface or your NIC that is connected to your DSL or cable
modem.In cases where one or more than one NIC are connected to
a private LANs behind the firewall, those interfaces must
have rules coded to allow free unmolested movement of
packets originating from those LAN interfaces.The rules should be first organized into three major
sections, all the free unmolested interfaces, public
interface outbound, and the public interface inbound.
The order of the rules in each of the public interface
sections should be in order of the most used rules being
placed before less often used rules with the last rule in
the section being a block log all packets on that interface
and direction.The Outbound section in the following rule set only
contains 'allow' rules which contain selection values that
uniquely identify the service that is authorized for public
Internet access. All the rules have the, proto, port,
in/out, via and keep state option coded. The 'proto tcp'
rules have the 'setup' option included to identify the start
session request as the trigger packet to be posted to the
keep state stateful table.The Inbound section has all the blocking of undesirable
packets first for two different reasons. First is these things
being blocked may be part of an otherwise valid packet which
may be allowed in by the later authorized service rules.
Second reason is that by having a rule that explicitly
blocks selected packets that I receive on an infrequent
bases and do not want to see in the log, this keeps them from
being caught by the last rule in the section which blocks
and logs all packets which have fallen through the rules.
The last rule in the section which blocks and logs all
packets is how you create the legal evidence needed to
prosecute the people who are attacking your system.Another thing you should take note of, is there is no
response returned for any of the undesirable stuff, their
packets just get dropped and vanish. This way the attackers
has no knowledge if his packets have reached your system.
The less the attackers can learn about your system the more
secure it is. When you log packets with port numbers you do
not recognize, look the numbers up in /etc/services/ or go to
and do a port number lookup to find what the purpose of that
port number is. Check out this link for port numbers used by
Trojans:
.An Example Inclusive RulesetThe following non-NATed rule set is a complete inclusive
type ruleset. You can not go wrong using this rule set for
you own. Just comment out any pass rules for services you
do not want. If you see messages in your log that you want to
stop seeing just add a deny rule in the inbound section. You
have to change the 'dc0' interface name in every rule to the
interface name of the NIC that connects your system to the
public Internet. For user ppp it would be 'tun0'.You will see a pattern in the usage of these rules.
All statements that are a request to start a session
to the public Internet use keep-state.All the authorized services that originate from the
public Internet have the limit option to stop flooding.
All rules use in or out to clarify direction.
All rules use via interface name to specify the
interface the packet is traveling over.The following rules go into
/etc/ipfw.rules.################ Start of IPFW rules file ###############################
# Flush out the list before we begin.
ipfw -q -f flush
# Set rules command prefix
cmd="ipfw -q add"
pif="dc0" # public interface name of NIC
# facing the public Internet
#################################################################
# No restrictions on Inside LAN Interface for private network
# Not needed unless you have LAN.
# Change xl0 to your LAN NIC interface name
#################################################################
#$cmd 00005 allow all from any to any via xl0
#################################################################
# No restrictions on Loopback Interface
#################################################################
$cmd 00010 allow all from any to any via lo0
#################################################################
# Allow the packet through if it has previous been added to the
# the "dynamic" rules table by a allow keep-state statement.
#################################################################
$cmd 00015 check-state
#################################################################
# Interface facing Public Internet (Outbound Section)
# Interrogate session start requests originating from behind the
# firewall on the private network or from this gateway server
# destine for the public Internet.
#################################################################
# Allow out access to my ISP's Domain name server.
# x.x.x.x must be the IP address of your ISP.s DNS
# Dup these lines if your ISP has more than one DNS server
# Get the IP addresses from /etc/resolv.conf file
$cmd 00110 allow tcp from any to x.x.x.x 53 out via $pif setup keep-state
$cmd 00111 allow udp from any to x.x.x.x 53 out via $pif keep-state
# Allow out access to my ISP's DHCP server for cable/DSL configurations.
# This rule is not needed for .user ppp. connection to the public Internet.
# so you can delete this whole group.
# Use the following rule and check log for IP address.
# Then put IP address in commented out rule & delete first rule
$cmd 00120 allow log udp from any to any 67 out via $pif keep-state
#$cmd 00120 allow udp from any to x.x.x.x 67 out via $pif keep-state
# Allow out non-secure standard www function
$cmd 00200 allow tcp from any to any 80 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out secure www function https over TLS SSL
$cmd 00220 allow tcp from any to any 443 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out send & get email function
$cmd 00230 allow tcp from any to any 25 out via $pif setup keep-state
$cmd 00231 allow tcp from any to any 110 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out FBSD (make install & CVSUP) functions
# Basically give user root "GOD" privileges.
$cmd 00240 allow tcp from me to any out via $pif setup keep-state uid root
# Allow out ping
$cmd 00250 allow icmp from any to any out via $pif keep-state
# Allow out Time
$cmd 00260 allow tcp from any to any 37 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out nntp news (i.e. news groups)
$cmd 00270 allow tcp from any to any 119 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out secure FTP, Telnet, and SCP
# This function is using SSH (secure shell)
$cmd 00280 allow tcp from any to any 22 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out whois
$cmd 00290 allow tcp from any to any 43 out via $pif setup keep-state
# deny and log everything else that.s trying to get out.
# This rule enforces the block all by default logic.
$cmd 00299 deny log all from any to any out via $pif
#################################################################
# Interface facing Public Internet (Inbound Section)
# Interrogate packets originating from the public Internet
# destine for this gateway server or the private network.
#################################################################
# Deny all inbound traffic from non-routable reserved address spaces
$cmd 00300 deny all from 192.168.0.0/16 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 00301 deny all from 172.16.0.0/12 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 00302 deny all from 10.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 00303 deny all from 127.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #loopback
$cmd 00304 deny all from 0.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #loopback
$cmd 00305 deny all from 169.254.0.0/16 to any in via $pif #DHCP auto-config
$cmd 00306 deny all from 192.0.2.0/24 to any in via $pif #reserved for docs
$cmd 00307 deny all from 204.152.64.0/23 to any in via $pif #Sun cluster interconnect
$cmd 00308 deny all from 224.0.0.0/3 to any in via $pif #Class D & E multicast
# Deny public pings
$cmd 00310 deny icmp from any to any in via $pif
# Deny ident
$cmd 00315 deny tcp from any to any 113 in via $pif
# Deny all Netbios service. 137=name, 138=datagram, 139=session
# Netbios is MS/Windows sharing services.
# Block MS/Windows hosts2 name server requests 81
$cmd 00320 deny tcp from any to any 137 in via $pif
$cmd 00321 deny tcp from any to any 138 in via $pif
$cmd 00322 deny tcp from any to any 139 in via $pif
$cmd 00323 deny tcp from any to any 81 in via $pif
# Deny any late arriving packets
$cmd 00330 deny all from any to any frag in via $pif
# Deny ACK packets that did not match the dynamic rule table
$cmd 00332 deny tcp from any to any established in via $pif
# Allow traffic in from ISP's DHCP server. This rule must contain
# the IP address of your ISP.s DHCP server as it.s the only
# authorized source to send this packet type.
# Only necessary for cable or DSL configurations.
# This rule is not needed for .user ppp. type connection to
# the public Internet. This is the same IP address you captured
# and used in the outbound section.
#$cmd 00360 allow udp from any to x.x.x.x 67 in via $pif keep-state
# Allow in standard www function because I have apache server
$cmd 00400 allow tcp from any to me 80 in via $pif setup limit src-addr 2
# Allow in secure FTP, Telnet, and SCP from public Internet
$cmd 00410 allow tcp from any to me 22 in via $pif setup limit src-addr 2
# Allow in non-secure Telnet session from public Internet
# labeled non-secure because ID & PW are passed over public
# Internet as clear text.
# Delete this sample group if you do not have telnet server enabled.
$cmd 00420 allow tcp from any to me 23 in via $pif setup limit src-addr 2
# Reject & Log all incoming connections from the outside
$cmd 00499 deny log all from any to any in via $pif
# Everything else is denied by default
# deny and log all packets that fell through to see what they are
$cmd 00999 deny log all from any to any
################ End of IPFW rules file ###############################
An Example NAT and Stateful RulesetNATand IPFWThere are some additional configuration statements that
need to be enabled to activate the NAT function of IPFW. The
kernel source needs 'option divert' statement added to the
other IPFIREWALL statements compiled into a custom kernel.
In addition to the normal IPFW options in
/etc/rc.conf, the following are needed.
natd_enable="YES" # Enable NATD function
natd_interface="rl0" # interface name of public Internet NIC
natd_flags="-dynamic -m" # -m = preserve port numbers if possibleUtilizing stateful rules with divert natd rule (Network
Address Translation) greatly complicates the rule set coding
logic. The positioning of the check-state, and 'divert natd'
rules in the rule set becomes very critical. This is no
longer a simple fall-through logic flow. A new action type
is used, called 'skipto'. To use the skipto command it is
mandatory that you number each rule so you know exactly
where the skipto rule number is you are really jumping to.
The following is an uncommented example of one coding
method, selected here to explain the sequence of the packet
flow through the rule sets.The processing flow starts with the first rule from the
top of the rule file and progress one rule at a time deeper
into the file until the end is reach or the packet being
tested to the selection criteria matches and the packet is
released out of the firewall. It is important to take notice
of the location of rule numbers 100 101, 450, 500, and 510.
These rules control the translation of the outbound and
inbound packets so their entries in the keep-state dynamic
table always register the private Lan IP address. Next
notice that all the allow and deny rules specified the
direction the packet is going (IE outbound or inbound) and
the interface. Also notice that all the start outbound
session requests all skipto rule 500 for the network address
translation.Lets say a LAN user uses their web browser to get a web
page. Web pages use port 80 to communicate over. So the
packet enters the firewall, It does not match 100 because
it is headed out not in. It passes rule 101 because this is
the first packet so it has not been posted to the keep-state
dynamic table yet. The packet finally comes to rule 125 a
matches. It is outbound through the NIC facing the public
Internet. The packet still has it's source IP address as a
private Lan IP address. On the match to this rule, two
actions take place. The keep-state option will post this rule
into the keep-state dynamic rules table and the specified
action is executed. The action is part of the info posted to
the dynamic table. In this case it is "skipto rule 500". Rule
500 NATs the packet IP address and out it goes. Remember
this, this is very important. This packet makes its way to
the destination and returns and enters the top of the rule
set. This time it does match rule 100 and has it destination
IP address mapped back to its corresponding Lan IP address.
It then is processed by the check-state rule, it's found in
the table as an existing session conversation and released
to the LAN. It goes to the LAN PC that sent it and a new
packet is sent requesting another segment of the data from
the remote server. This time it gets checked by the
check-state rule and its outbound entry is found, the
associated action, 'skipto 500', is executed. The packet
jumps to rule 500 gets NATed and released on it's way out.
On the inbound side, everything coming in that is part
of an existing session conversation is being automatically
handled by the check-state rule and the properly placed
divert natd rules. All we have to address is denying all the
bad packets and only allowing in the authorized services.
Lets say there is a apache server running on the firewall
box and we want people on the public Internet to be able to
access the local web site. The new inbound start request
packet matches rule 100 and its IP address is mapped to LAN
IP for the firewall box. The packet is them matched against
all the nasty things we want to check for and finally
matches against rule 425. On a match two things occur
The packet rule
is posted to the keep-state dynamic table but this time any
new session requests originating from that source IP address
is limited to 2. This defends against DoS attacks of service
running on the specified port number. The action is allow so
the packet is released to the LAN. On return the check-state
rule recognizes the packet as belonging to an existing
session conversation sends it to rule 500 for NATing and
released to outbound interface.Example Ruleset #1:#!/bin/sh
cmd="ipfw -q add"
skip="skipto 500"
pif=rl0
ks="keep-state"
good_tcpo="22,25,37,43,53,80,443,110,119"
ipfw -q -f flush
$cmd 002 allow all from any to any via xl0 # exclude LAN traffic
$cmd 003 allow all from any to any via lo0 # exclude loopback traffic
$cmd 100 divert natd ip from any to any in via $pif
$cmd 101 check-state
# Authorized outbound packets
$cmd 120 $skip udp from any to xx.168.240.2 53 out via $pif $ks
$cmd 121 $skip udp from any to xx.168.240.5 53 out via $pif $ks
$cmd 125 $skip tcp from any to any $good_tcpo out via $pif setup $ks
$cmd 130 $skip icmp from any to any out via $pif $ks
$cmd 135 $skip udp from any to any 123 out via $pif $ks
# Deny all inbound traffic from non-routable reserved address spaces
$cmd 300 deny all from 192.168.0.0/16 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 301 deny all from 172.16.0.0/12 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 302 deny all from 10.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 303 deny all from 127.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #loopback
$cmd 304 deny all from 0.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #loopback
$cmd 305 deny all from 169.254.0.0/16 to any in via $pif #DHCP auto-config
$cmd 306 deny all from 192.0.2.0/24 to any in via $pif #reserved for docs
$cmd 307 deny all from 204.152.64.0/23 to any in via $pif #Sun cluster
$cmd 308 deny all from 224.0.0.0/3 to any in via $pif #Class D & E multicast
# Authorized inbound packets
$cmd 400 allow udp from xx.70.207.54 to any 68 in $ks
$cmd 420 allow tcp from any to me 80 in via $pif setup limit src-addr 1
$cmd 450 deny log ip from any to any
# This is skipto location for outbound stateful rules
$cmd 500 divert natd ip from any to any out via $pif
$cmd 510 allow ip from any to any
######################## end of rules ##################
The following is pretty much the same as above, but uses
a self documenting coding style full of description comments
to help the inexperienced IPFW rule writer to better
understand what the rules are doing.Example Ruleset #2:
#!/bin/sh
################ Start of IPFW rules file ###############################
# Flush out the list before we begin.
ipfw -q -f flush
# Set rules command prefix
cmd="ipfw -q add"
skip="skipto 800"
pif="rl0" # public interface name of NIC
# facing the public Internet
#################################################################
# No restrictions on Inside LAN Interface for private network
# Change xl0 to your LAN NIC interface name
#################################################################
$cmd 005 allow all from any to any via xl0
#################################################################
# No restrictions on Loopback Interface
#################################################################
$cmd 010 allow all from any to any via lo0
#################################################################
# check if packet is inbound and nat address if it is
#################################################################
$cmd 014 divert natd ip from any to any in via $pif
#################################################################
# Allow the packet through if it has previous been added to the
# the "dynamic" rules table by a allow keep-state statement.
#################################################################
$cmd 015 check-state
#################################################################
# Interface facing Public Internet (Outbound Section)
# Interrogate session start requests originating from behind the
# firewall on the private network or from this gateway server
# destine for the public Internet.
#################################################################
# Allow out access to my ISP's Domain name server.
# x.x.x.x must be the IP address of your ISP's DNS
# Dup these lines if your ISP has more than one DNS server
# Get the IP addresses from /etc/resolv.conf file
$cmd 020 $skip tcp from any to x.x.x.x 53 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out access to my ISP's DHCP server for cable/DSL configurations.
$cmd 030 $skip udp from any to x.x.x.x 67 out via $pif keep-state
# Allow out non-secure standard www function
$cmd 040 $skip tcp from any to any 80 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out secure www function https over TLS SSL
$cmd 050 $skip tcp from any to any 443 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out send & get email function
$cmd 060 $skip tcp from any to any 25 out via $pif setup keep-state
$cmd 061 $skip tcp from any to any 110 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out FreeBSD (make install & CVSUP) functions
# Basically give user root "GOD" privileges.
$cmd 070 $skip tcp from me to any out via $pif setup keep-state uid root
# Allow out ping
$cmd 080 $skip icmp from any to any out via $pif keep-state
# Allow out Time
$cmd 090 $skip tcp from any to any 37 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out nntp news (i.e. news groups)
$cmd 100 $skip tcp from any to any 119 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out secure FTP, Telnet, and SCP
# This function is using SSH (secure shell)
$cmd 110 $skip tcp from any to any 22 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow out whois
$cmd 120 $skip tcp from any to any 43 out via $pif setup keep-state
# Allow ntp time server
$cmd 130 $skip udp from any to any 123 out via $pif keep-state
#################################################################
# Interface facing Public Internet (Inbound Section)
# Interrogate packets originating from the public Internet
# destine for this gateway server or the private network.
#################################################################
# Deny all inbound traffic from non-routable reserved address spaces
$cmd 300 deny all from 192.168.0.0/16 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 301 deny all from 172.16.0.0/12 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 302 deny all from 10.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #RFC 1918 private IP
$cmd 303 deny all from 127.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #loopback
$cmd 304 deny all from 0.0.0.0/8 to any in via $pif #loopback
$cmd 305 deny all from 169.254.0.0/16 to any in via $pif #DHCP auto-config
$cmd 306 deny all from 192.0.2.0/24 to any in via $pif #reserved for docs
$cmd 307 deny all from 204.152.64.0/23 to any in via $pif #Sun cluster
$cmd 308 deny all from 224.0.0.0/3 to any in via $pif #Class D & E multicast
# Deny ident
$cmd 315 deny tcp from any to any 113 in via $pif
# Deny all Netbios service. 137=name, 138=datagram, 139=session
# Netbios is MS/Windows sharing services.
# Block MS/Windows hosts2 name server requests 81
$cmd 320 deny tcp from any to any 137 in via $pif
$cmd 321 deny tcp from any to any 138 in via $pif
$cmd 322 deny tcp from any to any 139 in via $pif
$cmd 323 deny tcp from any to any 81 in via $pif
# Deny any late arriving packets
$cmd 330 deny all from any to any frag in via $pif
# Deny ACK packets that did not match the dynamic rule table
$cmd 332 deny tcp from any to any established in via $pif
# Allow traffic in from ISP's DHCP server. This rule must contain
# the IP address of your ISP's DHCP server as it's the only
# authorized source to send this packet type.
# Only necessary for cable or DSL configurations.
# This rule is not needed for 'user ppp' type connection to
# the public Internet. This is the same IP address you captured
# and used in the outbound section.
$cmd 360 allow udp from x.x.x.x to any 68 in via $pif keep-state
# Allow in standard www function because I have Apache server
$cmd 370 allow tcp from any to me 80 in via $pif setup limit src-addr 2
# Allow in secure FTP, Telnet, and SCP from public Internet
$cmd 380 allow tcp from any to me 22 in via $pif setup limit src-addr 2
# Allow in non-secure Telnet session from public Internet
# labeled non-secure because ID & PW are passed over public
# Internet as clear text.
# Delete this sample group if you do not have telnet server enabled.
$cmd 390 allow tcp from any to me 23 in via $pif setup limit src-addr 2
# Reject & Log all unauthorized incoming connections from the public Internet
$cmd 400 deny log all from any to any in via $pif
# Reject & Log all unauthorized out going connections to the public Internet
$cmd 450 deny log all from any to any out via $pif
# This is skipto location for outbound stateful rules
$cmd 800 divert natd ip from any to any out via $pif
$cmd 801 allow ip from any to any
# Everything else is denied by default
# deny and log all packets that fell through to see what they are
$cmd 999 deny log all from any to any
################ End of IPFW rules file ###############################
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/l10n/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/l10n/chapter.sgml
index ef38b601e9..52c06cbe80 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/l10n/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/l10n/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,971 +1,971 @@
Andrey A.ChernovContributed by Michael C.WuRewritten by Localization - I18N/L10N Usage and SetupSynopsisFreeBSD is a very distributed project with users and
contributors located all over the world. This chapter discusses
the internationalization and localization features of FreeBSD
that allow non-English speaking users to get real work done.
There are many aspects of the i18n implementation in both the system
and application levels, so where applicable we refer the reader
to more specific sources of documentation.After reading this chapter, you will know:How different languages and locales are encoded
on modern operating systems.How to set the locale for your login
shell.How to configure your console for non-English
languages.How to use X Window System effectively with different
languages.Where to find more information about writing
i18n-compliant applications.Before reading this chapter, you should:Know how to install additional third-party
applications ().The BasicsWhat Is I18N/L10N?internationalizationlocalizationlocalizationDevelopers shortened internationalization into the term I18N,
counting the number of letters between the first and the last
letters of internationalization. L10N uses the same naming
scheme, coming from localization. Combined
together, I18N/L10N methods, protocols, and applications allow
users to use languages of their choice.I18N applications are programmed using I18N kits under
libraries. It allows for developers to write a simple file and
translate displayed menus and texts to each language. We strongly
encourage programmers to follow this convention.Why Should I Use I18N/L10N?I18N/L10N is used whenever you wish to either view, input, or
process data in non-English languages.What Languages Are Supported in the I18N Effort?I18N and L10N are not FreeBSD specific. Currently, one can
choose from most of the major languages of the World, including
but not limited to: Chinese, German, Japanese, Korean, French,
Russian, Vietnamese and others.Using LocalizationIn all its splendor, I18N is not FreeBSD-specific and is a
convention. We encourage you to help FreeBSD in following this
convention.localeLocalization settings are based on three main terms:
Language Code, Country Code, and Encoding. Locale names are
constructed from these parts as follows:LanguageCode_CountryCode.EncodingLanguage and Country Codeslanguage codescountry codesIn order to localize a FreeBSD system to a specific language
(or any other I18N-supporting &unix; like systems), the user needs to find out
the codes for the specify country and language (country
codes tell applications what variation of given
language to use). In addition, web
browsers, SMTP/POP servers, web servers, etc. make decisions based on
them. The following are examples of language/country codes:Language/Country CodeDescriptionen_USEnglish - United Statesru_RURussian for Russiazh_TWTraditional Chinese for TaiwanEncodingsencodingsASCIISome languages use non-ASCII encodings that are 8-bit, wide
or multibyte characters, see &man.multibyte.3; for more
details. Older applications do not recognize them
and mistake them for control characters. Newer applications
usually do recognize 8-bit characters. Depending on the
implementation, users may be required to compile an application
with wide or multibyte characters support, or configure it correctly.
To be able to input and process wide or multibyte characters, the FreeBSD Ports Collection has provided
each language with different programs. Refer to the I18N
documentation in the respective FreeBSD Port.Specifically, the user needs to look at the application
documentation to decide on how to configure it correctly or to
pass correct values into the configure/Makefile/compiler.Some things to keep in mind are:Language specific single C chars character sets
(see &man.multibyte.3;), e.g.
ISO-8859-1, ISO-8859-15, KOI8-R, CP437.Wide or multibyte encodings, e.g. EUC, Big5.You can check the active list of character sets at the
IANA Registry.FreeBSD versions 4.5 and up use X11-compatible locale
encodings instead.I18N ApplicationsIn the FreeBSD Ports and Package system, I18N applications
have been named with I18N in their names for
easy identification. However, they do not always support the
language needed.Setting LocaleUsually it is sufficient to export the value of the locale name
as LANG in the login shell. This could be done in
the user's ~/.login_conf file or in the
startup file of the user's shell (~/.profile,
~/.bashrc, ~/.cshrc).
There is no need to set the locale subsets such as
LC_CTYPE, LC_CTIME. Please
refer to language-specific FreeBSD documentation for more
information.You should set the following two environment variables in your configuration
files:POSIXLANG for &posix; &man.setlocale.3; family
functionsMIMEMM_CHARSET for applications' MIME character
setThis includes the user shell configuration, the specific application
configuration, and the X11 configuration.Setting Locale Methodslocalelogin classThere are two methods for setting locale, and both are
described below. The first (recommended one) is by assigning
the environment variables in login
class, and the second is by adding the environment
variable assignments to the system's shell startup file.Login Classes MethodThis method allows environment variables needed for locale
name and MIME character sets to be assigned once for every
possible shell instead of adding specific shell assignments to
each shell's startup file. User
Level Setup can be done by an user himself and Administrator Level Setup require
superuser privileges.User Level SetupHere is a minimal example of a
.login_conf file in user's home
directory which has both variables set for Latin-1
encoding:me:\
:charset=ISO-8859-1:\
:lang=de_DE.ISO8859-1:Traditional ChineseBIG-5 encodingHere is an example of a
.login_conf that sets the variables
for Traditional Chinese in BIG-5 encoding. Notice the many
more variables set because some software does not respect
locale variables correctly for Chinese, Japanese, and Korean.#Users who do not wish to use monetary units or time formats
#of Taiwan can manually change each variable
me:\
:lang=zh_TW.Big5:\
:lc_all=zh_TW.Big:\
:lc_collate=zh_TW.Big5:\
:lc_ctype=zh_TW.Big5:\
:lc_messages=zh_TW.Big5:\
:lc_monetary=zh_TW.Big5:\
:lc_numeric=zh_TW.Big5:\
:lc_time=zh_TW.Big5:\
:charset=big5:\
:xmodifiers="@im=xcin": #Setting the XIM Input ServerSee Administrator Level
Setup and &man.login.conf.5; for more details.Administrator Level SetupVerify that the user's login class in
/etc/login.conf sets the correct
language. Make sure these settings
appear in /etc/login.conf:language_name:accounts_title:\
:charset=MIME_charset:\
:lang=locale_name:\
:tc=default:So sticking with our previous example using Latin-1, it
would look like this:german:German Users Accounts:\
:charset=ISO-8859-1:\
:lang=de_DE.ISO8859-1:\
:tc=default:Changing Login Classes with &man.vipw.8;vipwUse vipw to add new users, and make
the entry look like this:user:password:1111:11:language:0:0:User Name:/home/user:/bin/shChanging Login Classes with &man.adduser.8;adduserlogin classUse adduser to add new users, and do
the following:Set defaultclass =
language in
/etc/adduser.conf. Keep in mind
you must enter a default class for
all users of other languages in this case.An alternative variant is answering the specified
language each time that
Enter login class: default []:
appears from &man.adduser.8;.Another alternative is to use the following for each
user of a different language that you wish to
add:&prompt.root; adduser -class languageChanging Login Classes with &man.pw.8;pwIf you use &man.pw.8; for adding new users, call it in
this form:&prompt.root; pw useradd user_name -L languageShell Startup File MethodThis method is not recommended because it requires a
different setup for each possible shell program chosen. Use
the Login Class Method
instead.MIMElocaleTo add the locale name and MIME character set, just set
the two environment variables shown below in the
/etc/profile and/or
/etc/csh.login shell startup files. We
will use the German language as an example below:In /etc/profile:LANG=de_DE.ISO8859-1; export LANGMM_CHARSET=ISO-8859-1; export MM_CHARSETOr in /etc/csh.login:setenv LANG de_DE.ISO8859-1setenv MM_CHARSET ISO-8859-1Alternatively, you can add the above instructions to
/usr/share/skel/dot.profile (similar to
what was used in /etc/profile above), or
/usr/share/skel/dot.login (similar to
what was used in /etc/csh.login
above).For X11:In $HOME/.xinitrc:LANG=de_DE.ISO8859-1; export LANGOr:setenv LANG de_DE.ISO8859-1Depending on your shell (see above).Console SetupFor all single C chars character sets, set the correct
console fonts in /etc/rc.conf for the
language in question with:font8x16=font_name
font8x14=font_name
font8x8=font_nameThe font_name here is taken from
the /usr/share/syscons/fonts directory,
without the .fnt suffix.sysinstallkeymapscreenmapAlso be sure to set the correct keymap and screenmap for your
single C chars character set through
sysinstall (/stand/sysinstall
in &os; versions older than 5.2).
Once inside sysinstall, choose Configure, then
Console. Alternatively, you can add the
following to /etc/rc.conf:scrnmap=screenmap_name
keymap=keymap_name
keychange="fkey_number sequence"The screenmap_name here is taken
from the /usr/share/syscons/scrnmaps
directory, without the .scm suffix. A
screenmap with a corresponding mapped font is usually needed as a
workaround for expanding bit 8 to bit 9 on a VGA adapter's font
character matrix in pseudographics area, i.e., to move letters out
of that area if screen font uses a bit 8 column.If you have the moused daemon
enabled by setting the following
in your /etc/rc.conf:moused_enable="YES"then examine the mouse cursor information in the next
paragraph.mousedBy default the mouse cursor of the &man.syscons.4; driver occupies the
0xd0-0xd3 range in the character set. If your language uses this
range, you need to move the cursor's range outside of it. To enable
the workaround for FreeBSD versions before 5.0, insert the following
line into your kernel configuration:options SC_MOUSE_CHAR=0x03For FreeBSD versions 4.4 and up insert the following line
into /etc/rc.conf:mousechar_start=3The keymap_name here is taken from
the /usr/share/syscons/keymaps directory,
- without the .kbd suffix. If you're
+ without the .kbd suffix. If you are
uncertain which keymap to use, you use can &man.kbdmap.1; to test
keymaps without rebooting.The keychange is usually needed to program
function keys to match the selected terminal type because
function key sequences cannot be defined in the key map.Also be sure to set the correct console terminal type in
/etc/ttys for all ttyv*
entries. Current pre-defined correspondences are:Character SetTerminal TypeISO-8859-1 or ISO-8859-15cons25l1ISO-8859-2cons25l2ISO-8859-7cons25l7KOI8-Rcons25rKOI8-Ucons25uCP437 (VGA default)cons25US-ASCIIcons25wFor wide or multibyte characters languages, use the correct
FreeBSD port in your
/usr/ports/language
directory. Some ports appear as console while the system sees it
as serial vtty's, hence you must reserve enough vtty's for both
X11 and the pseudo-serial console. Here is a partial list of
applications for using other languages in console:LanguageLocationTraditional Chinese (BIG-5)chinese/big5conJapanesejapanese/kon2-16dot or
japanese/mule-freewnnKoreankorean/hanX11 SetupAlthough X11 is not part of the FreeBSD Project, we have
included some information here for FreeBSD users. For more
details, refer to the &xorg;
web site or whichever X11 Server you use.In ~/.Xresources, you can additionally
tune application specific I18N settings (e.g., fonts, menus,
etc.).Displaying FontsX11 True Type font serverInstall &xorg; server
(x11-servers/xorg-server)
or &xfree86; server
(x11-servers/XFree86-4-Server),
then install the language &truetype; fonts. Setting the correct
locale should allow you to view your selected language in menus
and such.Inputting Non-English CharactersX11 Input Method (XIM)The X11 Input Method (XIM) Protocol is a new standard for
all X11 clients. All X11 applications should be written as XIM
clients that take input from XIM Input servers. There are
several XIM servers available for different languages.Printer SetupSome single C chars character sets are usually hardware
coded into printers. Wide or multibyte
character sets require special setup and we recommend using
apsfilter. You may also convert the
document to &postscript; or PDF formats using language specific
converters.Kernel and File SystemsThe FreeBSD fast filesystem (FFS) is 8-bit clean, so it can be used
with any single C chars character set (see &man.multibyte.3;),
but there is no character set
name stored in the filesystem; i.e., it is raw 8-bit and does not
know anything about encoding order. Officially, FFS does not
support any form of wide or multibyte character sets yet. However, some
wide or multibyte character sets have independent patches for FFS
enabling such support. They are only temporary unportable
solutions or hacks and we have decided to not include them in the
source tree. Refer to respective languages' web sites for more
information and the patch files.DOSUnicodeThe FreeBSD &ms-dos; filesystem has the configurable ability to
convert between &ms-dos;, Unicode character sets and chosen
FreeBSD filesystem character sets. See &man.mount.msdos.8; for
details.Compiling I18N ProgramsMany FreeBSD Ports have been ported with I18N support. Some
of them are marked with -I18N in the port name. These and many
other programs have built in support for I18N and need no special
consideration.MySQLHowever, some applications such as
MySQL need to be have the
Makefile configured with the specific
charset. This is usually done in the
Makefile or done by passing a value to
configure in the source.Localizing FreeBSD to Specific LanguagesAndrey A.ChernovOriginally contributed by Russian Language (KOI8-R Encoding)localizationRussianFor more information about KOI8-R encoding, see the KOI8-R References
(Russian Net Character Set).Locale SetupPut the following lines into your
~/.login_conf file:me:My Account:\
:charset=KOI8-R:\
:lang=ru_RU.KOI8-R:See earlier in this chapter for examples of setting up the
locale.Console SetupFor the FreeBSD versions before 5.0 add the following line
to your kernel configuration file:options SC_MOUSE_CHAR=0x03For FreeBSD versions 4.4 and up insert the following
line into /etc/rc.conf:mousechar_start=3Use following settings in
/etc/rc.conf:keymap="ru.koi8-r"
scrnmap="koi8-r2cp866"
font8x16="cp866b-8x16"
font8x14="cp866-8x14"
font8x8="cp866-8x8"For each ttyv* entry in
/etc/ttys, use
cons25r as the terminal type.See earlier in this chapter for examples of setting up the
console.Printer SetupprintersSince most printers with Russian characters come with
hardware code page CP866, a special output filter is needed
to convert from KOI8-R to CP866. Such a filter is installed by
default as /usr/libexec/lpr/ru/koi2alt.
A Russian printer /etc/printcap entry
should look like:lp|Russian local line printer:\
:sh:of=/usr/libexec/lpr/ru/koi2alt:\
:lp=/dev/lpt0:sd=/var/spool/output/lpd:lf=/var/log/lpd-errs:See &man.printcap.5; for a detailed description.&ms-dos; FS and Russian FilenamesThe following example &man.fstab.5; entry enables support
for Russian filenames in mounted &ms-dos; filesystems:/dev/ad0s2 /dos/c msdos rw,-Wkoi2dos,-Lru_RU.KOI8-R 0 0The option selects the locale name
used, and sets the character conversion
table. To use the option, be sure to
mount /usr before the &ms-dos; partition
because the conversion tables are located in
/usr/libdata/msdosfs. For more
information, see the &man.mount.msdos.8; manual
page.X11 SetupDo non-X locale
setup first as described.The Russian KOI8-R locale
may not work with old &xfree86; releases (lower than 3.3).
&xorg; is now the default
version of the X Window System on FreeBSD.
This should not be an
issue unless you are using an old version of
FreeBSD.Go to the
russian/X.language directory
and issue the following command:&prompt.root; make installThe above port installs the latest version of the KOI8-R
fonts. &xorg; (as well as
&xfree86; version 3.3 and
above) already has some KOI8-R fonts, but these
are scaled better.Check the "Files" section
in your /etc/XF86Config file.
The following
lines must be added before any other
FontPath entries:FontPath "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/cyrillic/misc"
FontPath "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/cyrillic/75dpi"
FontPath "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/cyrillic/100dpi"If you use a high resolution video mode, swap the 75 dpi
and 100 dpi lines.To activate a Russian keyboard, add the following to the
"Keyboard" section of your
XF86Config file.For &xfree86; 3.X:XkbLayout "ru"
XkbOptions "grp:caps_toggle"For &xorg; (or
&xfree86; 4.X):Option "XkbLayout" "ru"
Option "XkbOptions" "grp:caps_toggle"Also make sure that XkbDisable is
turned off (commented out) there.The RUS/LAT switch will be CapsLock.
The old CapsLock function is still
available via ShiftCapsLock (in LAT mode
only).If you have &windows; keys on your keyboard,
and notice that some non-alphabetical keys are mapped
incorrectly in RUS mode, add the following line in your
XF86Config file.For &xfree86; 3.X:XkbVariant "winkeys"For &xorg; (or
&xfree86; 4.X):Option "XkbVariant" "winkeys"The Russian XKB keyboard may not work with old &xfree86;
versions, see the above
note for more information. The Russian XKB
keyboard may also not work with non-localized
applications as well. Minimally localized applications
should call a XtSetLanguageProc (NULL, NULL,
NULL); function early in the program.
See
KOI8-R for X Window for more instructions on
localizing X11 applications.Traditional Chinese Localization for TaiwanlocalizationTraditional ChineseThe FreeBSD-Taiwan Project has an Chinese HOWTO for
FreeBSD at
using many Chinese ports.
Current editor for the FreeBSD Chinese HOWTO is
Shen Chuan-Hsing statue@freebsd.sinica.edu.tw.
Chuan-Hsing Shen statue@freebsd.sinica.edu.tw has
created the
Chinese FreeBSD Collection (CFC) using FreeBSD-Taiwan's
zh-L10N-tut. The packages and the script files
are available at .German Language Localization (for All ISO 8859-1
Languages)localizationGermanSlaven Rezic eserte@cs.tu-berlin.de wrote a
tutorial how to use umlauts on a FreeBSD machine. The tutorial
is written in German and available at
.Japanese and Korean Language LocalizationlocalizationJapaneselocalizationKoreanFor Japanese, refer to
,
and for Korean, refer to
.Non-English FreeBSD DocumentationSome FreeBSD contributors have translated parts of FreeBSD to
other languages. They are available through links on the main site or in
/usr/share/doc.
diff --git a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/security/chapter.sgml b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/security/chapter.sgml
index 5a9d4914f3..9a422a7ce6 100644
--- a/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/security/chapter.sgml
+++ b/en_US.ISO8859-1/books/handbook/security/chapter.sgml
@@ -1,4890 +1,4890 @@
MatthewDillonMuch of this chapter has been taken from the
security(7) manual page by SecuritysecuritySynopsisThis chapter will provide a basic introduction to system security
concepts, some general good rules of thumb, and some advanced topics
under &os;. A lot of the topics covered here can be applied
to system and Internet security in general as well. The Internet
is no longer a friendly place in which everyone
wants to be your kind neighbor. Securing your system is imperative
to protect your data, intellectual property, time, and much more
from the hands of hackers and the like.&os; provides an array of utilities and mechanisms to ensure
the integrity and security of your system and network.After reading this chapter, you will know:Basic system security concepts, in respect to &os;.About the various crypt mechanisms available in &os;,
such as DES and MD5.How to set up one-time password authentication.How to configure TCP Wrappers for use
with inetd.How to set up KerberosIV on &os;
releases prior to 5.0.How to set up Kerberos5 on
post &os; 5.0 releases.How to configure IPsec and create a VPN between
&os;/&windows; machines.How to configure and use OpenSSH, &os;'s SSH
implementation.What file system ACLs are and how to use them.How to utilize the &os; security advisories
publications.Before reading this chapter, you should:Understand basic &os; and Internet concepts.Additional security topics are covered throughout this book.
For example, Mandatory Access Control is discussed in and Internet Firewalls are discussed in .IntroductionSecurity is a function that begins and ends with the system
administrator. While all BSD &unix; multi-user systems have some
inherent security, the job of building and maintaining additional
security mechanisms to keep those users honest is
probably one of the single largest undertakings of the sysadmin.
Machines are only as secure as you make them, and security concerns
are ever competing with the human necessity for convenience. &unix;
systems, in general, are capable of running a huge number of
simultaneous processes and many of these processes operate as
servers — meaning that external entities can connect and talk
to them. As yesterday's mini-computers and mainframes become
today's desktops, and as computers become networked and
internetwork, security becomes an even bigger issue.Security is best implemented through a layered
onion approach. In a nutshell, what you want to do is
to create as many layers of security as are convenient and then
carefully monitor the system for intrusions. You do not want to
overbuild your security or you will interfere with the detection
side, and detection is one of the single most important aspects of
any security mechanism. For example, it makes little sense to set
the schg flag (see &man.chflags.1;) on every
system binary because
while this may temporarily protect the binaries, it prevents an
attacker who has broken in from making an easily detectable change
that may result in your security mechanisms not detecting the attacker
at all.System security also pertains to dealing with various forms of
attack, including attacks that attempt to crash, or otherwise make a
system unusable, but do not attempt to compromise the
root account (break root).
Security concerns
can be split up into several categories:Denial of service attacks.User account compromises.Root compromise through accessible servers.Root compromise via user accounts.Backdoor creation.DoS attacksDenial of Service (DoS)securityDoS attacksDenial of Service (DoS)Denial of Service (DoS)A denial of service attack is an action that deprives the
machine of needed resources. Typically, DoS attacks are
brute-force mechanisms that attempt to crash or otherwise make a
machine unusable by overwhelming its servers or network stack. Some
DoS attacks try to take advantage of bugs in the networking
stack to crash a machine with a single packet. The latter can only
be fixed by applying a bug fix to the kernel. Attacks on servers
can often be fixed by properly specifying options to limit the load
the servers incur on the system under adverse conditions.
Brute-force network attacks are harder to deal with. A
spoofed-packet attack, for example, is nearly impossible to stop,
short of cutting your system off from the Internet. It may not be
able to take your machine down, but it can saturate your
Internet connection.securityaccount compromisesA user account compromise is even more common than a DoS
attack. Many sysadmins still run standard
telnetd, rlogind,
rshd,
and ftpd servers on their machines.
These servers, by default, do
not operate over encrypted connections. The result is that if you
have any moderate-sized user base, one or more of your users logging
into your system from a remote location (which is the most common
and convenient way to login to a system) will have his or her
password sniffed. The attentive system admin will analyze his
remote access logs looking for suspicious source addresses even for
successful logins.One must always assume that once an attacker has access to a
user account, the attacker can break root.
However, the reality is that in a well secured and maintained system,
access to a user account does not necessarily give the attacker
access to root. The distinction is important
because without access to root the attacker
cannot generally hide his tracks and may, at best, be able to do
nothing more than mess with the user's files, or crash the machine.
User account compromises are very common because users tend not to
take the precautions that sysadmins take.securitybackdoorsSystem administrators must keep in mind that there are
potentially many ways to break root on a machine.
The attacker may know the root password,
the attacker may find a bug in a root-run server and be able
to break root over a network
connection to that server, or the attacker may know of a bug in
a suid-root program that allows the attacker to break
root once he has broken into a user's account.
If an attacker has found a way to break root
on a machine, the attacker may not have a need
to install a backdoor. Many of the root holes
found and closed to date involve a considerable amount of work
by the attacker to cleanup after himself, so most attackers install
backdoors. A backdoor provides the attacker with a way to easily
regain root access to the system, but it
also gives the smart system administrator a convenient way
to detect the intrusion.
Making it impossible for an attacker to install a backdoor may
actually be detrimental to your security, because it will not
close off the hole the attacker found to break in the first
place.Security remedies should always be implemented with a
multi-layered onion peel approach and can be
categorized as follows:Securing root and staff accounts.Securing root–run servers
and suid/sgid binaries.Securing user accounts.Securing the password file.Securing the kernel core, raw devices, and
file systems.Quick detection of inappropriate changes made to the
system.Paranoia.The next section of this chapter will cover the above bullet
items in greater depth.Securing &os;securitysecuring &os;Command vs. ProtocolThroughout this document, we will use
bold text to refer to an
application, and a monospaced font to refer
to specific commands. Protocols will use a normal font. This
typographical distinction is useful for instances such as ssh,
since it is
a protocol as well as command.The sections that follow will cover the methods of securing your
&os; system that were mentioned in the last section of this chapter.Securing the root Account and
Staff AccountssuFirst off, do not bother securing staff accounts if you have
not secured the root account.
Most systems have a password assigned to the root
account. The first thing you do is assume
that the password is always compromised.
This does not mean that you should remove the password. The
password is almost always necessary for console access to the
machine. What it does mean is that you should not make it
possible to use the password outside of the console or possibly
even with the &man.su.1; command. For example, make sure that
your ptys are specified as being insecure in the
/etc/ttys file so that direct
root logins
via telnet or rlogin are
disallowed. If using other login services such as
sshd, make sure that direct
root logins are disabled there as well.
You can do this by editing
your /etc/ssh/sshd_config file, and making
sure that PermitRootLogin is set to
NO. Consider every access method —
services such as FTP often fall through the cracks.
Direct root logins should only be allowed
via the system console.wheelOf course, as a sysadmin you have to be able to get to
root, so we open up a few holes.
But we make sure these holes require additional password
verification to operate. One way to make root
accessible is to add appropriate staff accounts to the
wheel group (in
/etc/group). The staff members placed in the
wheel group are allowed to
su to root.
You should never give staff
members native wheel access by putting them in the
wheel group in their password entry. Staff
accounts should be placed in a staff group, and
then added to the wheel group via the
/etc/group file. Only those staff members
who actually need to have root access
should be placed in the
wheel group. It is also possible, when using
an authentication method such as Kerberos, to use Kerberos'
.k5login file in the root
account to allow a &man.ksu.1; to root
without having to place anyone at all in the
wheel group. This may be the better solution
since the wheel mechanism still allows an
intruder to break root if the intruder
has gotten hold of your
password file and can break into a staff account. While having
the wheel mechanism is better than having
nothing at all, it is not necessarily the safest option.An indirect way to secure staff accounts, and ultimately
root access is to use an alternative
login access method and
do what is known as starring out the encrypted
password for the staff accounts. Using the &man.vipw.8;
command, one can replace each instance of an encrypted password
with a single * character.
This command will update the /etc/master.passwd
file and user/password database to disable password-authenticated
logins.A staff account entry such as:foobar:R9DT/Fa1/LV9U:1000:1000::0:0:Foo Bar:/home/foobar:/usr/local/bin/tcshShould be changed to this:foobar:*:1000:1000::0:0:Foo Bar:/home/foobar:/usr/local/bin/tcshThis change will prevent normal logins from occurring,
since the encrypted password will never match
*. With this done,
staff members must use
another mechanism to authenticate themselves such as
&man.kerberos.1; or &man.ssh.1; using a public/private key
pair. When using something like Kerberos, one generally must
secure the machines which run the Kerberos servers and your
desktop workstation. When using a public/private key pair
with ssh, one must generally secure
the machine used to login from (typically
one's workstation). An additional layer of protection can be
added to the key pair by password protecting the key pair when
creating it with &man.ssh-keygen.1;. Being able to
star out the passwords for staff accounts also
guarantees that staff members can only login through secure
access methods that you have set up. This forces all staff
members to use secure, encrypted connections for all of their
sessions, which closes an important hole used by many
intruders: sniffing the network from an unrelated,
less secure machine.The more indirect security mechanisms also assume that you are
logging in from a more restrictive server to a less restrictive
server. For example, if your main box is running all sorts of
servers, your workstation should not be running any. In order for
your workstation to be reasonably secure you should run as few
servers as possible, up to and including no servers at all, and
you should run a password-protected screen blanker. Of course,
given physical access to a workstation an attacker can break any
sort of security you put on it. This is definitely a problem that
you should consider, but you should also consider the fact that the
vast majority of break-ins occur remotely, over a network, from
people who do not have physical access to your workstation or
servers.KerberosIVUsing something like Kerberos also gives you the ability to
disable or change the password for a staff account in one place,
and have it immediately affect all the machines on which the staff
member may have an account. If a staff member's account gets
compromised, the ability to instantly change his password on all
machines should not be underrated. With discrete passwords,
changing a password on N machines can be a mess. You can also
impose re-passwording restrictions with Kerberos: not only can a
Kerberos ticket be made to timeout after a while, but the Kerberos
system can require that the user choose a new password after a
certain period of time (say, once a month).Securing Root-run Servers and SUID/SGID BinariesntalkcomsatfingersandboxessshdtelnetdrshdrlogindThe prudent sysadmin only runs the servers he needs to, no
more, no less. Be aware that third party servers are often the
most bug-prone. For example, running an old version of
imapd or
popper is like giving a universal
root ticket out to the entire world.
Never run a server that you have not checked out carefully.
Many servers do not need to be run as root.
For example, the ntalk,
comsat, and
finger daemons can be run in special
user sandboxes. A sandbox is not perfect,
unless you go through a large amount of trouble, but the onion
approach to security still stands: If someone is able to break
in through a server running in a sandbox, they still have to
break out of the sandbox. The more layers the attacker must
break through, the lower the likelihood of his success. Root
holes have historically been found in virtually every server
ever run as root, including basic system servers.
If you are running a machine through which people only login via
sshd and never login via
telnetd or
rshd or
rlogind, then turn off those
services!&os; now defaults to running
ntalkd,
comsat, and
finger in a sandbox. Another program
which may be a candidate for running in a sandbox is &man.named.8;.
/etc/defaults/rc.conf includes the arguments
necessary to run named in a sandbox in a
commented-out form. Depending on whether you are installing a new
system or upgrading an existing system, the special user accounts
used by these sandboxes may not be installed. The prudent
sysadmin would research and implement sandboxes for servers
whenever possible.sendmailThere are a number of other servers that typically do not run
in sandboxes: sendmail,
popper,
imapd, ftpd,
and others. There are alternatives to some of these, but
installing them may require more work than you are willing to
perform (the convenience factor strikes again). You may have to
run these servers as root and rely on other
mechanisms to detect break-ins that might occur through them.The other big potential root holes in a
system are the
suid-root and sgid binaries installed on the system. Most of
these binaries, such as rlogin, reside
in /bin, /sbin,
/usr/bin, or /usr/sbin.
While nothing is 100% safe, the system-default suid and sgid
binaries can be considered reasonably safe. Still,
root holes are occasionally found in these
binaries. A root hole was found in
Xlib in 1998 that made
xterm (which is typically suid)
vulnerable. It is better to be safe than sorry and the prudent
sysadmin will restrict suid binaries, that only staff should run,
to a special group that only staff can access, and get rid of
(chmod 000) any suid binaries that nobody uses.
A server with no display generally does not need an
xterm binary. Sgid binaries can be
almost as dangerous. If an intruder can break an sgid-kmem binary,
the intruder might be able to read /dev/kmem
and thus read the encrypted password file, potentially compromising
any passworded account. Alternatively an intruder who breaks
group kmem can monitor keystrokes sent through
ptys, including ptys used by users who login through secure
methods. An intruder that breaks the tty
group can write to
almost any user's tty. If a user is running a terminal program or
emulator with a keyboard-simulation feature, the intruder can
potentially generate a data stream that causes the user's terminal
to echo a command, which is then run as that user.Securing User AccountsUser accounts are usually the most difficult to secure. While
you can impose Draconian access restrictions on your staff and
star out their passwords, you may not be able to
do so with any general user accounts you might have. If you do
have sufficient control, then you may win out and be able to secure
the user accounts properly. If not, you simply have to be more
vigilant in your monitoring of those accounts. Use of
ssh and Kerberos for user accounts is
more problematic, due to the extra administration and technical
support required, but still a very good solution compared to a
crypted password file.Securing the Password FileThe only sure fire way is to * out as many
passwords as you can and use ssh or
Kerberos for access to those accounts. Even though the encrypted
password file (/etc/spwd.db) can only be read
by root, it may be possible for an intruder
to obtain read access to that file even if the attacker cannot
obtain root-write access.Your security scripts should always check for and report
changes to the password file (see the Checking file integrity section
below).Securing the Kernel Core, Raw Devices, and
File systemsIf an attacker breaks root he can do
just about anything, but
there are certain conveniences. For example, most modern kernels
have a packet sniffing device driver built in. Under &os; it
is called the bpf device. An intruder
will commonly attempt to run a packet sniffer on a compromised
machine. You do not need to give the intruder the capability and
most systems do not have the need for the
bpf device compiled in.sysctlBut even if you turn off the bpf
device, you still have
/dev/mem and
/dev/kmem
to worry about. For that matter, the intruder can still write to
raw disk devices. Also, there is another kernel feature called
the module loader, &man.kldload.8;. An enterprising intruder can
use a KLD module to install his own bpf
device, or other sniffing
device, on a running kernel. To avoid these problems you have to
run the kernel at a higher secure level, at least securelevel 1.
The securelevel can be set with a sysctl on
the kern.securelevel variable. Once you have
set the securelevel to 1, write access to raw devices will be
denied and special chflags flags,
such as schg,
will be enforced. You must also ensure that the
schg flag is set on critical startup binaries,
directories, and script files — everything that gets run up
to the point where the securelevel is set. This might be overdoing
it, and upgrading the system is much more difficult when you
operate at a higher secure level. You may compromise and run the
system at a higher secure level but not set the
schg flag for every system file and directory
under the sun. Another possibility is to simply mount
/ and /usr read-only.
It should be noted that being too Draconian in what you attempt to
protect may prevent the all-important detection of an
intrusion.Checking File Integrity: Binaries, Configuration Files,
Etc.When it comes right down to it, you can only protect your core
system configuration and control files so much before the
convenience factor rears its ugly head. For example, using
chflags to set the schg bit
on most of the files in / and
/usr is probably counterproductive, because
while it may protect the files, it also closes a detection window.
The last layer of your security onion is perhaps the most
important — detection. The rest of your security is pretty
much useless (or, worse, presents you with a false sense of
safety) if you cannot detect potential incursions. Half the job
of the onion is to slow down the attacker, rather than stop him, in
order to give the detection side of the equation a chance to catch
him in the act.The best way to detect an incursion is to look for modified,
missing, or unexpected files. The best way to look for modified
files is from another (often centralized) limited-access system.
Writing your security scripts on the extra-secure limited-access
system makes them mostly invisible to potential attackers, and this
is important. In order to take maximum advantage you generally
have to give the limited-access box significant access to the
other machines in the business, usually either by doing a
read-only NFS export of the other machines to the limited-access
box, or by setting up ssh key-pairs to
allow the limited-access box to ssh to
the other machines. Except for its network traffic, NFS is the
least visible method — allowing you to monitor the
file systems on each client box virtually undetected. If your
limited-access server is connected to the client boxes through a
switch, the NFS method is often the better choice. If your
limited-access server is connected to the client boxes through a
hub, or through several layers of routing, the NFS method may be
too insecure (network-wise) and using
ssh may be the better choice even with
the audit-trail tracks that ssh
lays.Once you give a limited-access box, at least read access to the
client systems it is supposed to monitor, you must write scripts
to do the actual monitoring. Given an NFS mount, you can write
scripts out of simple system utilities such as &man.find.1; and
&man.md5.1;. It is best to physically md5 the client-box files
at least once a day, and to test control files such as those
found in /etc and
/usr/local/etc even more often. When
mismatches are found, relative to the base md5 information the
limited-access machine knows is valid, it should scream at a
sysadmin to go check it out. A good security script will also
check for inappropriate suid binaries and for new or deleted files
on system partitions such as / and
/usr.When using ssh rather than NFS,
writing the security script is much more difficult. You
essentially have to scp the scripts to the client
box in order to
run them, making them visible, and for safety you also need to
scp the binaries (such as find) that those
scripts use. The ssh client on the
client box may already be compromised. All in all, using
ssh may be necessary when running over
insecure links, but it is also a lot harder to deal with.A good security script will also check for changes to user and
staff members access configuration files:
.rhosts, .shosts,
.ssh/authorized_keys and so forth…
files that might fall outside the purview of the
MD5 check.If you have a huge amount of user disk space, it may take too
long to run through every file on those partitions. In this case,
setting mount flags to disallow suid binaries and devices on those
partitions is a good idea. The nodev and
nosuid options (see &man.mount.8;) are what you
want to look into. You should probably scan them anyway, at least
once a week, since the object of this layer is to detect a break-in
whether or not the break-in is effective.Process accounting (see &man.accton.8;) is a relatively
low-overhead feature of the operating system which might help
as a post-break-in evaluation mechanism. It is especially
useful in tracking down how an intruder has actually broken into
a system, assuming the file is still intact after the break-in
occurs.Finally, security scripts should process the log files, and the
logs themselves should be generated in as secure a manner as
possible — remote syslog can be very useful. An intruder
tries to cover his tracks, and log files are critical to the
sysadmin trying to track down the time and method of the initial
break-in. One way to keep a permanent record of the log files is
to run the system console to a serial port and collect the
information on a continuing basis through a secure machine
monitoring the consoles.ParanoiaA little paranoia never hurts. As a rule, a sysadmin can add
any number of security features, as long as they do not affect
convenience, and can add security features that
do affect convenience with some added thought.
Even more importantly, a security administrator should mix it up a
bit — if you use recommendations such as those given by this
document verbatim, you give away your methodologies to the
prospective attacker who also has access to this document.Denial of Service AttacksDenial of Service (DoS)This section covers Denial of Service attacks. A DoS attack
is typically a packet attack. While there is not much you can do
about modern spoofed packet attacks that saturate your network,
you can generally limit the damage by ensuring that the attacks
cannot take down your servers.Limiting server forks.Limiting springboard attacks (ICMP response attacks, ping
broadcast, etc.).Kernel Route Cache.A common DoS attack is against a forking server that attempts
to cause the server to eat processes, file descriptors, and memory,
until the machine dies. inetd
(see &man.inetd.8;) has several
options to limit this sort of attack. It should be noted that
while it is possible to prevent a machine from going down, it is
not generally possible to prevent a service from being disrupted
by the attack. Read the inetd manual
page carefully and pay
specific attention to the , ,
and options. Note that spoofed-IP attacks
will circumvent the option to
inetd, so
typically a combination of options must be used. Some standalone
servers have self-fork-limitation parameters.Sendmail has its
option, which tends to work
much better than trying to use sendmail's load limiting options
due to the load lag. You should specify a
MaxDaemonChildren parameter, when you start
sendmail, high enough to handle your
expected load, but not so high that the computer cannot handle that
number of sendmails without falling on
its face. It is also prudent to run sendmail in queued mode
() and to run the daemon
(sendmail -bd) separate from the queue-runs
(sendmail -q15m). If you still want real-time
delivery you can run the queue at a much lower interval, such as
, but be sure to specify a reasonable
MaxDaemonChildren option for
that sendmail to prevent cascade failures.Syslogd can be attacked directly
and it is strongly recommended that you use the
option whenever possible, and the option
otherwise.You should also be fairly careful with connect-back services
such as TCP Wrapper's reverse-identd,
which can be attacked directly. You generally do not want to use
the reverse-ident feature of
TCP Wrapper for this reason.It is a very good idea to protect internal services from
external access by firewalling them off at your border routers.
The idea here is to prevent saturation attacks from outside your
LAN, not so much to protect internal services from network-based
root compromise.
Always configure an exclusive firewall, i.e.,
firewall everything except ports A, B,
C, D, and M-Z. This way you can firewall off all of your
low ports except for certain specific services such as
named (if you are primary for a zone),
ntalkd,
sendmail, and other Internet-accessible
services. If you try to configure the firewall the other way
— as an inclusive or permissive firewall, there is a good
chance that you will forget to close a couple of
services, or that you will add a new internal service and forget
to update the firewall. You can still open up the high-numbered
port range on the firewall, to allow permissive-like operation,
without compromising your low ports. Also take note that &os;
allows you to control the range of port numbers used for dynamic
binding, via the various net.inet.ip.portrangesysctl's (sysctl -a | fgrep
portrange), which can also ease the complexity of your
firewall's configuration. For example, you might use a normal
first/last range of 4000 to 5000, and a hiport range of 49152 to
65535, then block off everything under 4000 in your firewall
(except for certain specific Internet-accessible ports, of
course).ICMP_BANDLIMAnother common DoS attack is called a springboard attack
— to attack a server in a manner that causes the server to
generate responses which overloads the server, the local
network, or some other machine. The most common attack of this
nature is the ICMP ping broadcast attack.
The attacker spoofs ping packets sent to your LAN's broadcast
address with the source IP address set to the actual machine they
wish to attack. If your border routers are not configured to
stomp on ping's to broadcast addresses, your LAN winds up
generating sufficient responses to the spoofed source address to
saturate the victim, especially when the attacker uses the same
trick on several dozen broadcast addresses over several dozen
different networks at once. Broadcast attacks of over a hundred
and twenty megabits have been measured. A second common
springboard attack is against the ICMP error reporting system.
By constructing packets that generate ICMP error responses, an
attacker can saturate a server's incoming network and cause the
server to saturate its outgoing network with ICMP responses. This
type of attack can also crash the server by running it out of
mbuf's, especially if the server cannot drain the ICMP responses
it generates fast enough. The &os; kernel has a new kernel
compile option called
which limits the effectiveness
of these sorts of attacks. The last major class of springboard
attacks is related to certain internal
inetd services such as the
udp echo service. An attacker simply spoofs a UDP packet with the
source address being server A's echo port, and the destination
address being server B's echo port, where server A and B are both
on your LAN. The two servers then bounce this one packet back and
forth between each other. The attacker can overload both servers
and their LANs simply by injecting a few packets in this manner.
Similar problems exist with the internal
chargen port. A
competent sysadmin will turn off all of these inetd-internal test
services.Spoofed packet attacks may also be used to overload the kernel
route cache. Refer to the net.inet.ip.rtexpire,
rtminexpire, and rtmaxcachesysctl parameters. A spoofed packet attack
that uses a random source IP will cause the kernel to generate a
temporary cached route in the route table, viewable with
netstat -rna | fgrep W3. These routes
typically timeout in 1600 seconds or so. If the kernel detects
that the cached route table has gotten too big it will dynamically
reduce the rtexpire but will never decrease it
to less than rtminexpire. There are two
problems:The kernel does not react quickly enough when a lightly
loaded server is suddenly attacked.The rtminexpire is not low enough for
the kernel to survive a sustained attack.If your servers are connected to the Internet via a T3 or
better, it may be prudent to manually override both
rtexpire and rtminexpire
via &man.sysctl.8;. Never set either parameter to zero (unless
you want to crash the machine). Setting both
parameters to 2 seconds should be sufficient to protect the route
table from attack.Access Issues with Kerberos and SSHsshKerberosIVThere are a few issues with both Kerberos and
ssh that need to be addressed if
you intend to use them. Kerberos V is an excellent
authentication protocol, but there are bugs in the kerberized
telnet and
rlogin applications that make them
unsuitable for dealing with binary streams. Also, by default
Kerberos does not encrypt a session unless you use the
option. ssh
encrypts everything by default.ssh works quite well in every
respect except that it forwards encryption keys by default. What
this means is that if you have a secure workstation holding keys
that give you access to the rest of the system, and you
ssh to an insecure machine, your keys
are usable. The actual keys themselves are not exposed, but
ssh installs a forwarding port for the
duration of your login, and if an attacker has broken
root on the
insecure machine he can utilize that port to use your keys to gain
access to any other machine that your keys unlock.We recommend that you use ssh in
combination with Kerberos whenever possible for staff logins.
ssh can be compiled with Kerberos
support. This reduces your reliance on potentially exposed
ssh keys while at the same time
protecting passwords via Kerberos. ssh
keys should only be used for automated tasks from secure machines
(something that Kerberos is unsuited to do). We also recommend that
you either turn off key-forwarding in the
ssh configuration, or that you make use
of the from=IP/DOMAIN option that
ssh allows in its
authorized_keys file to make the key only
usable to entities logging in from specific machines.BillSwingleParts rewritten and updated by DES, MD5, and CryptsecuritycryptcryptDESMD5Every user on a &unix; system has a password associated with
their account. It seems obvious that these passwords need to be
known only to the user and the actual operating system. In
order to keep these passwords secret, they are encrypted with
what is known as a one-way hash, that is, they can
only be easily encrypted but not decrypted. In other words, what
we told you a moment ago was obvious is not even true: the
operating system itself does not really know
the password. It only knows the encrypted
form of the password. The only way to get the
plain-text password is by a brute force search of the
space of possible passwords.Unfortunately the only secure way to encrypt passwords when
&unix; came into being was based on DES, the Data Encryption
Standard. This was not such a problem for users resident in
the US, but since the source code for DES could not be exported
outside the US, &os; had to find a way to both comply with
US law and retain compatibility with all the other &unix;
variants that still used DES.The solution was to divide up the encryption libraries
so that US users could install the DES libraries and use
DES but international users still had an encryption method
that could be exported abroad. This is how &os; came to
use MD5 as its default encryption method. MD5 is believed to
be more secure than DES, so installing DES is offered primarily
for compatibility reasons.Recognizing Your Crypt MechanismBefore &os; 4.4 libcrypt.a was a
symbolic link pointing to the library which was used for
encryption. &os; 4.4 changed libcrypt.a to
provide a configurable password authentication hash library.
Currently the library supports DES, MD5 and Blowfish hash
functions. By default &os; uses MD5 to encrypt
passwords.It is pretty easy to identify which encryption method
&os; is set up to use. Examining the encrypted passwords in
the /etc/master.passwd file is one way.
Passwords encrypted with the MD5 hash are longer than those
encrypted with the DES hash and also begin with the characters
$1$. Passwords starting with
$2a$ are encrypted with the
Blowfish hash function. DES password strings do not
have any particular identifying characteristics, but they are
shorter than MD5 passwords, and are coded in a 64-character
alphabet which does not include the $
character, so a relatively short string which does not begin with
a dollar sign is very likely a DES password.The password format used for new passwords is controlled
by the passwd_format login capability in
/etc/login.conf, which takes values of
des, md5 or
blf. See the &man.login.conf.5; manual page
for more information about login capabilities.One-time Passwordsone-time passwordssecurityone-time passwordsS/Key is a one-time password scheme based on a one-way hash
function. &os; uses the MD4 hash for compatibility but other
systems have used MD5 and DES-MAC. S/Key has been part of the
&os; base system since version 1.1.5 and is also used on a
growing number of other operating systems. S/Key is a registered
trademark of Bell Communications Research, Inc.From version 5.0 of &os;, S/Key has been replaced with
the functionally equivalent OPIE (One-time Passwords In
Everything). OPIE uses the MD5 hash by default.There are three different sorts of passwords which we will discuss
below. The first is your usual &unix; style or
Kerberos password; we will call this a &unix; password.
The second sort is the one-time password which is generated by the
S/Key key program or the OPIE
&man.opiekey.1; program and accepted by the
keyinit or &man.opiepasswd.1; programs
and the login prompt; we will
call this a one-time password. The final sort of
password is the secret password which you give to the
key/opiekey programs (and
sometimes the
keyinit/opiepasswd programs)
which it uses to generate
one-time passwords; we will call it a secret password
or just unqualified password.The secret password does not have anything to do with your &unix;
password; they can be the same but this is not recommended. S/Key
and OPIE secret passwords are not limited to 8 characters like old
&unix; passwordsUnder &os; the standard login
password may be up to 128 characters in length.,
they can be as long as you like. Passwords of six or
seven word long phrases are fairly common. For the most part, the
S/Key or OPIE system operates completely independently of the &unix;
password system.Besides the password, there are two other pieces of data that
are important to S/Key and OPIE. One is what is known as the
seed or key, consisting of two letters
and five digits. The other is what is called the iteration
count, a number between 1 and 100. S/Key creates the
one-time password by concatenating the seed and the secret password,
then applying the MD4/MD5 hash as many times as specified by the
iteration count and turning the result into six short English words.
These six English words are your one-time password. The
authentication system (primarily PAM) keeps
track of the last one-time password used, and the user is
authenticated if the hash of the user-provided password is equal to
the previous password. Because a one-way hash is used it is
impossible to generate future one-time passwords if a successfully
used password is captured; the iteration count is decremented after
each successful login to keep the user and the login program in
sync. When the iteration count gets down to 1, S/Key and OPIE must be
reinitialized.There are three programs involved in each system
which we will discuss below. The key and
opiekey programs accept an iteration
count, a seed, and a secret password, and generate a one-time
password or a consecutive list of one-time passwords. The
keyinit and opiepasswd
programs are used to initialize S/Key and OPIE respectively,
and to change passwords, iteration counts, or seeds; they
take either a secret passphrase, or an iteration count,
seed, and one-time password. The keyinfo
and opieinfo programs examine the
relevant credentials files (/etc/skeykeys or
/etc/opiekeys) and print out the invoking user's
current iteration count and seed.There are four different sorts of operations we will cover. The
first is using keyinit or
opiepasswd over a secure connection to set up
one-time-passwords for the first time, or to change your password
or seed. The second operation is using keyinit
or opiepasswd over an insecure connection, in
conjunction with key or opiekey
over a secure connection, to do the same. The third is using
key/opiekey to log in over
an insecure connection. The fourth is using key
or opiekey to generate a number of keys which
can be written down or printed out to carry with you when going to
some location without secure connections to anywhere.Secure Connection InitializationTo initialize S/Key for the first time, change your password,
or change your seed while logged in over a secure connection
(e.g. on the console of a machine or via ssh), use the
keyinit command without any parameters while
logged in as yourself:&prompt.user; keyinit
Adding unfurl:
Reminder - Only use this method if you are directly connected.
If you are using telnet or rlogin exit with no password and use keyinit -s.
Enter secret password:
Again secret password:
ID unfurl s/key is 99 to17757
DEFY CLUB PRO NASH LACE SOFTFor OPIE, opiepasswd is used instead:&prompt.user; opiepasswd -c
[grimreaper] ~ $ opiepasswd -f -c
Adding unfurl:
Only use this method from the console; NEVER from remote. If you are using
telnet, xterm, or a dial-in, type ^C now or exit with no password.
Then run opiepasswd without the -c parameter.
Using MD5 to compute responses.
Enter new secret pass phrase:
Again new secret pass phrase:
ID unfurl OTP key is 499 to4268
MOS MALL GOAT ARM AVID COED
At the Enter new secret pass phrase: or
Enter secret password: prompts, you
should enter a password or phrase. Remember, this is not the
password that you will use to login with, this is used to generate
your one-time login keys. The ID line gives the
parameters of your particular instance: your login name, the
iteration count, and seed. When logging in the system
will remember these parameters and present them back to you so you
do not have to remember them. The last line gives the particular
one-time password which corresponds to those parameters and your
secret password; if you were to re-login immediately, this
one-time password is the one you would use.Insecure Connection InitializationTo initialize or change your secret password over an
insecure connection, you will need to already have a secure
connection to some place where you can run key
or opiekey; this might be in the form of a
desk accessory on a &macintosh;, or a shell prompt on a machine you
trust. You will also need to make up an iteration count (100 is
probably a good value), and you may make up your own seed or use a
randomly-generated one. Over on the insecure connection (to the
machine you are initializing), use the keyinit
-s command:&prompt.user; keyinit -s
Updating unfurl:
Old key: to17758
Reminder you need the 6 English words from the key command.
Enter sequence count from 1 to 9999: 100
Enter new key [default to17759]:
s/key 100 to 17759
s/key access password:
s/key access password:CURE MIKE BANE HIM RACY GOREFor OPIE, you need to use opiepasswd:&prompt.user; opiepasswd
Updating unfurl:
You need the response from an OTP generator.
Old secret pass phrase:
otp-md5 498 to4268 ext
Response: GAME GAG WELT OUT DOWN CHAT
New secret pass phrase:
otp-md5 499 to4269
Response: LINE PAP MILK NELL BUOY TROY
ID mark OTP key is 499 gr4269
LINE PAP MILK NELL BUOY TROY
To accept the default seed (which the
keyinit program confusingly calls a
key), press Return.
Then before entering an
access password, move over to your secure connection or S/Key desk
accessory, and give it the same parameters:&prompt.user; key 100 to17759
Reminder - Do not use this program while logged in via telnet or rlogin.
Enter secret password: <secret password>
CURE MIKE BANE HIM RACY GOREOr for OPIE:&prompt.user; opiekey 498 to4268
Using the MD5 algorithm to compute response.
Reminder: Don't use opiekey from telnet or dial-in sessions.
Enter secret pass phrase:
GAME GAG WELT OUT DOWN CHAT
Now switch back over to the insecure connection, and copy the
one-time password generated over to the relevant program.Generating a Single One-time PasswordOnce you have initialized S/Key or OPIE, when you login you will be
presented with a prompt like this:&prompt.user; telnet example.com
Trying 10.0.0.1...
Connected to example.com
Escape character is '^]'.
FreeBSD/i386 (example.com) (ttypa)
login: <username>
s/key 97 fw13894
Password: Or for OPIE:&prompt.user; telnet example.com
Trying 10.0.0.1...
Connected to example.com
Escape character is '^]'.
FreeBSD/i386 (example.com) (ttypa)
login: <username>
otp-md5 498 gr4269 ext
Password: As a side note, the S/Key and OPIE prompts have a useful feature
(not shown here): if you press Return
at the password prompt, the
prompter will turn echo on, so you can see what you are
typing. This can be extremely useful if you are attempting to
type in a password by hand, such as from a printout.MS-DOSWindowsMacOSAt this point you need to generate your one-time password to
answer this login prompt. This must be done on a trusted system
that you can run key or
opiekey on. (There are versions of these for DOS,
&windows; and &macos; as well.) They need both the iteration count and
the seed as command line options. You can cut-and-paste these
right from the login prompt on the machine that you are logging
in to.On the trusted system:&prompt.user; key 97 fw13894
Reminder - Do not use this program while logged in via telnet or rlogin.
Enter secret password:
WELD LIP ACTS ENDS ME HAAGFor OPIE:&prompt.user; opiekey 498 to4268
Using the MD5 algorithm to compute response.
Reminder: Don't use opiekey from telnet or dial-in sessions.
Enter secret pass phrase:
GAME GAG WELT OUT DOWN CHATNow that you have your one-time password you can continue
logging in:login: <username>
s/key 97 fw13894
Password: <return to enable echo>
s/key 97 fw13894
Password [echo on]: WELD LIP ACTS ENDS ME HAAG
Last login: Tue Mar 21 11:56:41 from 10.0.0.2 ... Generating Multiple One-time PasswordsSometimes you have to go places where you do not have
access to a trusted machine or secure connection. In this case,
it is possible to use the key and
opiekey commands to
generate a number of one-time passwords beforehand to be printed
out and taken with you. For example:&prompt.user; key -n 5 30 zz99999
Reminder - Do not use this program while logged in via telnet or rlogin.
Enter secret password: <secret password>
26: SODA RUDE LEA LIND BUDD SILT
27: JILT SPY DUTY GLOW COWL ROT
28: THEM OW COLA RUNT BONG SCOT
29: COT MASH BARR BRIM NAN FLAG
30: CAN KNEE CAST NAME FOLK BILKOr for OPIE:&prompt.user; opiekey -n 5 30 zz99999
Using the MD5 algorithm to compute response.
Reminder: Don't use opiekey from telnet or dial-in sessions.
Enter secret pass phrase: <secret password>
26: JOAN BORE FOSS DES NAY QUIT
27: LATE BIAS SLAY FOLK MUCH TRIG
28: SALT TIN ANTI LOON NEAL USE
29: RIO ODIN GO BYE FURY TIC
30: GREW JIVE SAN GIRD BOIL PHIThe requests five keys in sequence, the
specifies what the last iteration number
should be. Note that these are printed out in
reverse order of eventual use. If you are
really paranoid, you might want to write the results down by hand;
otherwise you can cut-and-paste into lpr. Note
that each line shows both the iteration count and the one-time
password; you may still find it handy to scratch off passwords as
you use them.Restricting Use of &unix; PasswordsS/Key can place restrictions on the use of &unix; passwords based
on the host name, user name, terminal port, or IP address of a
login session. These restrictions can be found in the
configuration file /etc/skey.access. The
&man.skey.access.5; manual page has more information on the complete
format of the file and also details some security cautions to be
aware of before depending on this file for security.If there is no /etc/skey.access file
(this is the default on &os; 4.X systems), then all users will
be allowed to use &unix; passwords. If the file exists, however,
then all users will be required to use S/Key unless explicitly
permitted to do otherwise by configuration statements in the
skey.access file. In all cases, &unix;
passwords are permitted on the console.Here is a sample skey.access configuration
file which illustrates the three most common sorts of configuration
statements:permit internet 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0
permit user fnord
permit port ttyd0The first line (permit internet) allows
users whose IP source address (which is vulnerable to spoofing)
matches the specified value and mask, to use &unix; passwords. This
should not be considered a security mechanism, but rather, a means
to remind authorized users that they are using an insecure network
and need to use S/Key for authentication.The second line (permit user) allows the
specified username, in this case fnord, to use
&unix; passwords at any time. Generally speaking, this should only
be used for people who are either unable to use the
key program, like those with dumb terminals, or
those who are ineducable.The third line (permit port) allows all
users logging in on the specified terminal line to use &unix;
passwords; this would be used for dial-ups.OPIE can restrict the use of &unix; passwords based on the IP
address of a login session just like S/Key does. The relevant file
is /etc/opieaccess, which is present by default
on &os; 5.0 and newer systems. Please check &man.opieaccess.5;
for more information on this file and which security considerations
you should be aware of when using it.Here is a sample opieaccess file:permit 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0This line allows users whose IP source address (which is
vulnerable to spoofing) matches the specified value and mask,
to use &unix; passwords at any time.If no rules in opieaccess are matched,
the default is to deny non-OPIE logins.TomRhodesWritten by: TCP WrappersTCP WrappersAnyone familiar with &man.inetd.8; has probably heard
of TCP Wrappers at some point. But few
individuals seem to fully comprehend its usefulness in a
network environment. It seems that everyone wants to
install a firewall to handle network connections. While a
firewall has a wide variety of uses, there are some things
that a firewall not handle such as sending text back to the
connection originator. The TCP software
does this and much more. In the next few sections many of
the TCP Wrappers features will be discussed,
and, when applicable, example configuration lines will be
provided.The TCP Wrappers software extends the
abilities of inetd to provide support for
every server daemon under its control. Using this method it
is possible to provide logging support, return messages to
connections, permit a daemon to only accept internal connections,
etc. While some of these features can be provided by implementing
a firewall, this will add not only an extra layer of protection
but go beyond the amount of control a firewall can
provide.The added functionality of TCP Wrappers
should not be considered a replacement for a good firewall.
TCP Wrappers can be used in conjunction
with a firewall or other security enhancements though and
it can serve nicely as an extra layer of protection
for the system.Since this is an extension to the configuration of
inetd, the reader is expected have
read the inetd configuration
section.While programs run by &man.inetd.8; are not exactly
daemons, they have traditionally been called
daemons. This is the term we will use in this section too.Initial ConfigurationThe only requirement of using TCP
Wrappers in &os; is to ensure the inetd
server is started from rc.conf with the
option; this is the default setting. Of
course, proper configuration of
/etc/hosts.allow is also expected, but
&man.syslogd.8; will throw messages in the system logs in
these cases.Unlike other implementations of TCP
Wrappers, the use of hosts.deny has
been deprecated. All configuration options should be placed
in /etc/hosts.allow.In the simplest configuration, daemon connection policies
are set to either be permitted or blocked depending on the
options in /etc/hosts.allow. The default
configuration in &os; is to allow a connection to every daemon
started with inetd. Changing this will be
discussed only after the basic configuration is covered.Basic configuration usually takes the form of
daemon : address : action. Where
daemon is the daemon name which
inetd started. The
address can be a valid hostname, an
IP address or an IPv6 address enclosed in
brackets ([ ]). The action field can be either allow
or deny to grant or deny access appropriately. Keep in mind
that configuration works off a first rule match semantic,
meaning that the configuration file is scanned in ascending
order for a matching rule. When a match is found the rule
is applied and the search process will halt.Several other options exist but they will be explained
in a later section. A simple configuration line may easily be
constructed from that information alone. For example, to
allow POP3 connections via the
mail/qpopper daemon,
the following lines should be appended to
hosts.allow:# This line is required for POP3 connections:
qpopper : ALL : allowAfter adding this line, inetd will need
restarted. This can be accomplished by use of the &man.kill.1;
command, or with the restart parameter
with /etc/rc.d/inetd.Advanced ConfigurationTCP Wrappers has advanced
options too; they will allow for more control over the
way connections are handled. In some cases it may be
a good idea to return a comment to certain hosts or
daemon connections. In other cases, perhaps a log file
should be recorded or an email sent to the administrator.
Other situations may require the use of a service for local
connections only. This is all possible through the use of
configuration options known as wildcards,
expansion characters and external command execution. The
next two sections are written to cover these situations.External CommandsSuppose that a situation occurs where a connection
should be denied yet a reason should be sent to the
individual who attempted to establish that connection. How
could it be done? That action can be made possible by
using the option. When a connection
attempt is made, will be called to
execute a shell command or script. An example already exists
in the hosts.allow file:# The rest of the daemons are protected.
ALL : ALL \
: severity auth.info \
: twist /bin/echo "You are not welcome to use %d from %h."This example shows that the message,
You are not allowed to use daemon
from hostname. will be returned
for any daemon not previously configured in the access file.
This is extremely useful for sending a reply back to the
connection initiator right after the established connection
is dropped. Note that any message returned
must be wrapped in quote
" characters; there are no exceptions to
this rule.It may be possible to launch a denial of service attack
on the server if an attacker, or group of attackers could
flood these daemons with connection requests.Another possibility is to use the
option in these cases. Like , the
implicitly denies the connection and
may be used to run external shell commands or scripts.
Unlike , will
not send a reply back to the individual who established the
connection. For an example, consider the following
configuration line:# We do not allow connections from example.com:
ALL : .example.com \
: spawn (/bin/echo %a from %h attempted to access %d >> \
/var/log/connections.log) \
: denyThis will deny all connection attempts from the
*.example.com domain;
simultaneously logging the hostname, IP
address and the daemon which they attempted to access in the
/var/log/connections.log file.Aside from the already explained substitution characters
above, e.g. %a, a few others exist. See the
&man.hosts.access.5; manual page for the complete list.Wildcard OptionsThus far the ALL example has been used
continuously throughout the examples. Other options exist
which could extend the functionality a bit further. For
instance, ALL may be used to match every
instance of either a daemon, domain or an
IP address. Another wildcard available is
PARANOID which may be used to match any
host which provides an IP address that may
be forged. In other words, paranoid may
be used to define an action to be taken whenever a connection
is made from an IP address that differs
from its hostname. The following example may shed some more
light on this discussion:# Block possibly spoofed requests to sendmail:
sendmail : PARANOID : denyIn that example all connection requests to
sendmail which have an
IP address that varies from its hostname
will be denied.Using the PARANOID may severely
cripple servers if the client or server has a broken
DNS setup. Administrator discretion
is advised.To learn more about wildcards and their associated
functionality, see the &man.hosts.access.5; manual
page.Before any of the specific configuration lines above will
work, the first configuration line should be commented out
in hosts.allow. This was noted at the
beginning of this section.MarkMurrayContributed by MarkDapozBased on a contribution by KerberosIVKerberos is a network add-on system/protocol that allows users to
authenticate themselves through the services of a secure server.
Services such as remote login, remote copy, secure inter-system file
copying and other high-risk tasks are made considerably safer and more
controllable.The following instructions can be used as a guide on how to set up
Kerberos as distributed for &os;. However, you should refer to the
relevant manual pages for a complete description.Installing KerberosIVMITKerberosIVinstallingKerberos is an optional component of &os;. The easiest
way to install this software is by selecting the krb4 or
krb5 distribution in sysinstall
during the initial installation of &os;. This will install
the eBones (KerberosIV) or Heimdal (Kerberos5)
implementation of Kerberos. These implementations are
included because they are developed outside the USA/Canada and
were thus available to system owners outside those countries
during the era of restrictive export controls on cryptographic
code from the USA.Alternatively, the MIT implementation of Kerberos is
available from the Ports Collection as
security/krb5.Creating the Initial DatabaseThis is done on the Kerberos server only. First make sure that
you do not have any old Kerberos databases around. You should change
to the directory /etc/kerberosIV and check that
only the following files are present:&prompt.root; cd /etc/kerberosIV
&prompt.root; ls
README krb.conf krb.realmsIf any additional files (such as principal.*
or master_key) exist, then use the
kdb_destroy command to destroy the old Kerberos
database, or if Kerberos is not running, simply delete the extra
files.You should now edit the krb.conf and
krb.realms files to define your Kerberos realm.
In this case the realm will be EXAMPLE.COM and the
server is grunt.example.com. We edit
or create the krb.conf file:&prompt.root; cat krb.conf
EXAMPLE.COM
EXAMPLE.COM grunt.example.com admin server
CS.BERKELEY.EDU okeeffe.berkeley.edu
ATHENA.MIT.EDU kerberos.mit.edu
ATHENA.MIT.EDU kerberos-1.mit.edu
ATHENA.MIT.EDU kerberos-2.mit.edu
ATHENA.MIT.EDU kerberos-3.mit.edu
LCS.MIT.EDU kerberos.lcs.mit.edu
TELECOM.MIT.EDU bitsy.mit.edu
ARC.NASA.GOV trident.arc.nasa.govIn this case, the other realms do not need to be there. They are
here as an example of how a machine may be made aware of multiple
realms. You may wish to not include them for simplicity.The first line names the realm in which this system works. The
other lines contain realm/host entries. The first item on a line is a
realm, and the second is a host in that realm that is acting as a
key distribution center. The words admin
server following a host's name means that host also
provides an administrative database server. For further explanation
of these terms, please consult the Kerberos manual pages.Now we have to add grunt.example.com
to the EXAMPLE.COM realm and also add an entry to
put all hosts in the .example.com
domain in the EXAMPLE.COM realm. The
krb.realms file would be updated as
follows:&prompt.root; cat krb.realms
grunt.example.com EXAMPLE.COM
.example.com EXAMPLE.COM
.berkeley.edu CS.BERKELEY.EDU
.MIT.EDU ATHENA.MIT.EDU
.mit.edu ATHENA.MIT.EDUAgain, the other realms do not need to be there. They are here as
an example of how a machine may be made aware of multiple realms. You
may wish to remove them to simplify things.The first line puts the specific system into
the named realm. The rest of the lines show how to default systems of
a particular subdomain to a named realm.Now we are ready to create the database. This only needs to run
on the Kerberos server (or Key Distribution Center). Issue the
kdb_init command to do this:&prompt.root; kdb_initRealm name [default ATHENA.MIT.EDU ]:EXAMPLE.COM
You will be prompted for the database Master Password.
It is important that you NOT FORGET this password.
Enter Kerberos master key:Now we have to save the key so that servers on the local machine
can pick it up. Use the kstash command to do
this:&prompt.root; kstashEnter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!This saves the encrypted master password in
/etc/kerberosIV/master_key.Making It All RunKerberosIVinitial startupTwo principals need to be added to the database for
each system that will be secured with Kerberos.
Their names are kpasswd and rcmd.
These two principals are made for each system, with the instance being
the name of the individual system.These daemons, kpasswd and
rcmd allow other systems to change Kerberos
passwords and run commands like &man.rcp.1;,
&man.rlogin.1; and &man.rsh.1;.Now let us add these entries:&prompt.root; kdb_edit
Opening database...
Enter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Previous or default values are in [brackets] ,
enter return to leave the same, or new value.
Principal name:passwdInstance:grunt
<Not found>, Create [y] ?y
Principal: passwd, Instance: grunt, kdc_key_ver: 1
New Password: <---- enter RANDOM here
Verifying password
New Password: <---- enter RANDOM here
Random password [y] ?y
Principal's new key version = 1
Expiration date (enter yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2000-01-01 ] ?Max ticket lifetime (*5 minutes) [ 255 ] ?Attributes [ 0 ] ?
Edit O.K.
Principal name:rcmdInstance:grunt
<Not found>, Create [y] ?
Principal: rcmd, Instance: grunt, kdc_key_ver: 1
New Password: <---- enter RANDOM here
Verifying password
New Password: <---- enter RANDOM here
Random password [y] ?
Principal's new key version = 1
Expiration date (enter yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2000-01-01 ] ?Max ticket lifetime (*5 minutes) [ 255 ] ?Attributes [ 0 ] ?
Edit O.K.
Principal name: <---- null entry here will cause an exitCreating the Server FileWe now have to extract all the instances which define the
services on each machine. For this we use the
ext_srvtab command. This will create a file
which must be copied or moved by secure
means to each Kerberos client's
/etc/kerberosIV directory. This file must
be present on each server and client, and is crucial to the
operation of Kerberos.&prompt.root; ext_srvtab gruntEnter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Generating 'grunt-new-srvtab'....Now, this command only generates a temporary file which must be
renamed to srvtab so that all the servers can pick
it up. Use the &man.mv.1; command to move it into place on
the original system:&prompt.root; mv grunt-new-srvtab srvtabIf the file is for a client system, and the network is not deemed
safe, then copy the
client-new-srvtab to
removable media and transport it by secure physical means. Be sure to
rename it to srvtab in the client's
/etc/kerberosIV directory, and make sure it is
mode 600:&prompt.root; mv grumble-new-srvtab srvtab
&prompt.root; chmod 600 srvtabPopulating the DatabaseWe now have to add some user entries into the database. First
let us create an entry for the user jane. Use the
kdb_edit command to do this:&prompt.root; kdb_edit
Opening database...
Enter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Previous or default values are in [brackets] ,
enter return to leave the same, or new value.
Principal name:janeInstance:
<Not found>, Create [y] ?y
Principal: jane, Instance: , kdc_key_ver: 1
New Password: <---- enter a secure password here
Verifying password
New Password: <---- re-enter the password here
Principal's new key version = 1
Expiration date (enter yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2000-01-01 ] ?Max ticket lifetime (*5 minutes) [ 255 ] ?Attributes [ 0 ] ?
Edit O.K.
Principal name: <---- null entry here will cause an exitTesting It All OutFirst we have to start the Kerberos daemons. Note that if you
have correctly edited your /etc/rc.conf then this
will happen automatically when you reboot. This is only necessary on
the Kerberos server. Kerberos clients will automatically get what
they need from the /etc/kerberosIV
directory.&prompt.root; kerberos &
Kerberos server starting
Sleep forever on error
Log file is /var/log/kerberos.log
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Current Kerberos master key version is 1
Local realm: EXAMPLE.COM
&prompt.root; kadmind -n &
KADM Server KADM0.0A initializing
Please do not use 'kill -9' to kill this job, use a
regular kill instead
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!Now we can try using the kinit command to get a
ticket for the ID jane that we created
above:&prompt.user; kinit jane
MIT Project Athena (grunt.example.com)
Kerberos Initialization for "jane"
Password:Try listing the tokens using klist to see if we
really have them:&prompt.user; klist
Ticket file: /tmp/tkt245
Principal: jane@EXAMPLE.COM
Issued Expires Principal
Apr 30 11:23:22 Apr 30 19:23:22 krbtgt.EXAMPLE.COM@EXAMPLE.COMNow try changing the password using &man.passwd.1; to
check if the kpasswd daemon can get
authorization to the Kerberos database:&prompt.user; passwd
realm EXAMPLE.COM
Old password for jane:New Password for jane:
Verifying password
New Password for jane:
Password changed.Adding su PrivilegesKerberos allows us to give each user
who needs root privileges their own
separate &man.su.1; password.
We could now add an ID which is authorized to
&man.su.1; to root. This is
controlled by having an instance of root
associated with a principal. Using kdb_edit
we can create the entry jane.root in the
Kerberos database:&prompt.root; kdb_edit
Opening database...
Enter Kerberos master key:
Current Kerberos master key version is 1.
Master key entered. BEWARE!
Previous or default values are in [brackets] ,
enter return to leave the same, or new value.
Principal name:janeInstance:root
<Not found>, Create [y] ? y
Principal: jane, Instance: root, kdc_key_ver: 1
New Password: <---- enter a SECURE password here
Verifying password
New Password: <---- re-enter the password here
Principal's new key version = 1
Expiration date (enter yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2000-01-01 ] ?Max ticket lifetime (*5 minutes) [ 255 ] ?12 <--- Keep this short!
Attributes [ 0 ] ?
Edit O.K.
Principal name: <---- null entry here will cause an exitNow try getting tokens for it to make sure it works:&prompt.root; kinit jane.root
MIT Project Athena (grunt.example.com)
Kerberos Initialization for "jane.root"
Password:Now we need to add the user to root's
.klogin file:&prompt.root; cat /root/.klogin
jane.root@EXAMPLE.COMNow try doing the &man.su.1;:&prompt.user; suPassword:and take a look at what tokens we have:&prompt.root; klist
Ticket file: /tmp/tkt_root_245
Principal: jane.root@EXAMPLE.COM
Issued Expires Principal
May 2 20:43:12 May 3 04:43:12 krbtgt.EXAMPLE.COM@EXAMPLE.COMUsing Other CommandsIn an earlier example, we created a principal called
jane with an instance root.
This was based on a user with the same name as the principal, and this
is a Kerberos default; that a
<principal>.<instance> of the form
<username>.root will allow
that <username> to &man.su.1; to
root if the necessary entries are in the
.klogin file in root's
home directory:&prompt.root; cat /root/.klogin
jane.root@EXAMPLE.COMLikewise, if a user has in their own home directory lines of the
form:&prompt.user; cat ~/.klogin
jane@EXAMPLE.COM
jack@EXAMPLE.COMThis allows anyone in the EXAMPLE.COM realm
who has authenticated themselves as jane or
jack (via kinit, see above)
to access to jane's
account or files on this system (grunt) via
&man.rlogin.1;, &man.rsh.1; or
&man.rcp.1;.For example, jane now logs into another system using
Kerberos:&prompt.user; kinit
MIT Project Athena (grunt.example.com)
Password:
&prompt.user; rlogin grunt
Last login: Mon May 1 21:14:47 from grumble
Copyright (c) 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1994
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
FreeBSD BUILT-19950429 (GR386) #0: Sat Apr 29 17:50:09 SAT 1995Or jack logs into jane's account on the same machine
(jane having
set up the .klogin file as above, and the person
in charge of Kerberos having set up principal
jack with a null instance):&prompt.user; kinit
&prompt.user; rlogin grunt -l jane
MIT Project Athena (grunt.example.com)
Password:
Last login: Mon May 1 21:16:55 from grumble
Copyright (c) 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1994
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
FreeBSD BUILT-19950429 (GR386) #0: Sat Apr 29 17:50:09 SAT 1995TillmanHodgsonContributed by MarkMurrayBased on a contribution by Kerberos5Every &os; release beyond &os;-5.1 includes support
only for Kerberos5. Hence
Kerberos5 is the only version
included, and its configuration is similar in many aspects
to that of KerberosIV. The following
information only applies to
Kerberos5 in post &os;-5.0
releases. Users who wish to use the
KerberosIV package may install the
security/krb4 port.Kerberos is a network add-on
system/protocol that allows users to authenticate themselves
through the services of a secure server. Services such as remote
login, remote copy, secure inter-system file copying and other
high-risk tasks are made considerably safer and more
controllable.Kerberos can be described as an
identity-verifying proxy system. It can also be described as a
trusted third-party authentication system.
Kerberos provides only one
function — the secure authentication of users on the network.
It does not provide authorization functions (what users are
allowed to do) or auditing functions (what those users did).
After a client and server have used
Kerberos to prove their identity, they
can also encrypt all of their communications to assure privacy
and data integrity as they go about their business.Therefore it is highly recommended that
Kerberos be used with other security
methods which provide authorization and audit services.The following instructions can be used as a guide on how to set
up Kerberos as distributed for &os;.
However, you should refer to the relevant manual pages for a complete
description.For purposes of demonstrating a Kerberos
installation, the various name spaces will be handled as follows:The DNS domain (zone)
will be example.org.The Kerberos realm will be
EXAMPLE.ORG.Please use real domain names when setting up
Kerberos even if you intend to run
it internally. This avoids DNS problems
and assures inter-operation with other
Kerberos realms.HistoryKerberos5historyKerberos was created by
MIT as a solution to network security problems.
The Kerberos protocol uses strong
cryptography so that a client can prove its identity to a server
(and vice versa) across an insecure network connection.Kerberos is both the name of a
network authentication protocol and an adjective to describe
programs that implement the program
(Kerberos telnet, for example). The
current version of the protocol is version 5, described in
RFC 1510.Several free implementations of this protocol are available,
covering a wide range of operating systems. The Massachusetts
Institute of Technology (MIT), where
Kerberos was originally developed,
continues to develop their Kerberos
package. It is commonly used in the US
as a cryptography product, as such it
has historically been affected by US export
regulations. The MIT
Kerberos is available as a port
(security/krb5). Heimdal
Kerberos is another version 5
implementation, and was explicitly developed outside of the
US to avoid export
regulations (and is thus often included in non-commercial &unix;
variants). The Heimdal Kerberos
distribution is available as a port
(security/heimdal), and a
minimal installation of it is included in the base &os;
install.In order to reach the widest audience, these instructions assume
the use of the Heimdal distribution included in &os;.Setting up a Heimdal KDCKerberos5Key Distribution CenterThe Key Distribution Center (KDC) is the
centralized authentication service that
Kerberos provides — it is the
computer that issues Kerberos tickets.
The KDC is considered trusted by
all other computers in the Kerberos
realm, and thus has heightened security concerns.Note that while running the Kerberos
server requires very few computing resources, a dedicated machine
acting only as a KDC is recommended for security
reasons.To begin setting up a KDC, ensure that your
/etc/rc.conf file contains the correct
settings to act as a KDC (you may need to adjust
paths to reflect your own system):kerberos5_server_enable="YES"
kadmind5_server_enable="YES"
kerberos_stash="YES"The is only available in
&os; 4.X.Next we will set up your Kerberos
config file, /etc/krb5.conf:[libdefaults]
default_realm = EXAMPLE.ORG
[realms]
EXAMPLE.ORG = {
kdc = kerberos.example.org
admin_server = kerberos.example.org
}
[domain_realm]
.example.org = EXAMPLE.ORGNote that this /etc/krb5.conf file implies
that your KDC will have the fully-qualified
hostname of kerberos.example.org.
You will need to add a CNAME (alias) entry to your zone file to
accomplish this if your KDC has a different
hostname.For large networks with a properly configured
BIND DNS server, the
above example could be trimmed to:[libdefaults]
default_realm = EXAMPLE.ORGWith the following lines being appended to the
example.org zonefile:_kerberos._udp IN SRV 01 00 88 kerberos.example.org.
_kerberos._tcp IN SRV 01 00 88 kerberos.example.org.
_kpasswd._udp IN SRV 01 00 464 kerberos.example.org.
_kerberos-adm._tcp IN SRV 01 00 749 kerberos.example.org.
_kerberos IN TXT EXAMPLE.ORG.For clients to be able to find the
Kerberos services, you
must have either a fully configured
/etc/krb5.conf or a miminally configured
/etc/krb5.confand a
properly configured DNS server.Next we will create the Kerberos
database. This database contains the keys of all principals encrypted
with a master password. You are not
required to remember this password, it will be stored in a file
(/var/heimdal/m-key). To create the master
key, run kstash and enter a password.Once the master key has been created, you can initialize the
database using the kadmin program with the
-l option (standing for local).
This option instructs kadmin to modify the
database files directly rather than going through the
kadmind network service. This handles the
chicken-and-egg problem of trying to connect to the database
before it is created. Once you have the kadmin
prompt, use the init command to create your
realms initial database.Lastly, while still in kadmin, create your
first principal using the add command. Stick
to the defaults options for the principal for now, you can always
change them later with the modify command.
Note that you can use the ? command at any
prompt to see the available options.A sample database creation session is shown below:&prompt.root; kstash
Master key: xxxxxxxx
Verifying password - Master key: xxxxxxxx
&prompt.root; kadmin -l
kadmin> init EXAMPLE.ORG
Realm max ticket life [unlimited]:
kadmin> add tillman
Max ticket life [unlimited]:
Max renewable life [unlimited]:
Attributes []:
Password: xxxxxxxx
Verifying password - Password: xxxxxxxxNow it is time to start up the KDC services.
Run /etc/rc.d/kerberos start and
/etc/rc.d/kadmind start to bring up the
services. Note that you will not have any kerberized daemons running
at this point but you should be able to confirm the that the
KDC is functioning by obtaining and listing a
ticket for the principal (user) that you just created from the
command-line of the KDC itself:&prompt.user; k5init tillman
tillman@EXAMPLE.ORG's Password:
&prompt.user; k5list
Credentials cache: FILE:/tmp/krb5cc_500
Principal: tillman@EXAMPLE.ORG
Issued Expires Principal
Aug 27 15:37:58 Aug 28 01:37:58 krbtgt/EXAMPLE.ORG@EXAMPLE.ORGKerberos enabling a server with
Heimdal servicesKerberos5enabling servicesFirst, we need a copy of the Kerberos
configuration file, /etc/krb5.conf. To do
so, simply copy it over to the client computer from the
KDC in a secure fashion (using network utilities,
such as &man.scp.1;, or physically via a
floppy disk).Next you need a /etc/krb5.keytab file.
This is the major difference between a server providing
Kerberos enabled daemons and a
workstation — the server must have a
keytab file. This file
contains the servers host key, which allows it and the
KDC to verify each others identity. It
must be transmitted to the server in a secure fashion, as the
security of the server can be broken if the key is made public.
This explicitly means that transferring it via a clear text
channel, such as FTP, is a very bad idea.Typically, you transfer to the keytab
to the server using the kadmin program.
This is handy because you also need to create the host principal
(the KDC end of the
krb5.keytab) using
kadmin.Note that you must have already obtained a ticket and that this
ticket must be allowed to use the kadmin
interface in the kadmind.acl. See the section
titled Remote administration in the Heimdal info
pages (info heimdal) for details on designing
access control lists. If you do not want to enable remote
kadmin access, you can simply securely connect
to the KDC (via local console,
&man.ssh.1; or Kerberos
&man.telnet.1;) and perform administration locally
using kadmin -l.After installing the /etc/krb5.conf file,
you can use kadmin from the
Kerberos server. The
add --random-key command will let you add the
servers host principal, and the ext command
will allow you to extract the servers host principal to its own
keytab. For example:&prompt.root; kadmin
kadmin> add --random-key host/myserver.example.org
Max ticket life [unlimited]:
Max renewable life [unlimited]:
Attributes []:
kadmin> ext host/myserver.example.org
kadmin> exitNote that the ext command (short for
extract) stores the extracted key in
/etc/krb5.keytab by default.If you do not have kadmind running on the
KDC (possibly for security reasons) and thus
do not have access to kadmin remotely, you
can add the host principal
(host/myserver.EXAMPLE.ORG) directly on the
KDC and then extract it to a temporary file
(to avoid over-writing the /etc/krb5.keytab
on the KDC) using something like this:&prompt.root; kadmin
kadmin> ext --keytab=/tmp/example.keytab host/myserver.example.org
kadmin> exitYou can then securely copy the keytab to the server
computer (using scp or a floppy, for
example). Be sure to specify a non-default keytab name
to avoid over-writing the keytab on the
KDC.At this point your server can communicate with the
KDC (due to its krb5.conf
file) and it can prove its own identity (due to the
krb5.keytab file). It is now ready for
you to enable some Kerberos services.
For this example we will enable the telnet
service by putting a line like this into your
/etc/inetd.conf and then restarting the
&man.inetd.8; service with
/etc/rc.d/inetd restart:telnet stream tcp nowait root /usr/libexec/telnetd telnetd -a userThe critical bit is that the -a
(for authentication) type is set to user. Consult the
&man.telnetd.8; manual page for more details.Kerberos enabling a client with HeimdalKerberos5configure clientsSetting up a client computer is almost trivially easy. As
far as Kerberos configuration goes,
you only need the Kerberos
configuration file, located at /etc/krb5.conf.
Simply securely copy it over to the client computer from the
KDC.Test your client computer by attempting to use
kinit, klist, and
kdestroy from the client to obtain, show, and
then delete a ticket for the principal you created above. You
should also be able to use Kerberos
applications to connect to Kerberos
enabled servers, though if that does not work and obtaining a
ticket does the problem is likely with the server and not with
the client or the KDC.When testing an application like telnet,
try using a packet sniffer (such as &man.tcpdump.1;)
to confirm that your password is not sent in the clear. Try
using telnet with the -x
option, which encrypts the entire data stream (similar to
ssh).The core Kerberos client applications
(traditionally named kinit,
klist, kdestroy, and
kpasswd) are installed in
the base &os; install. Note that &os; versions prior to 5.0
renamed them to k5init,
k5list, k5destroy,
k5passwd, and k5stash
(though it is typically only used once).Various non-core Kerberos client
applications are also installed by default. This is where the
minimal nature of the base Heimdal installation is
felt: telnet is the only
Kerberos enabled service.The Heimdal port adds some of the missing client applications:
Kerberos enabled versions of
ftp, rsh,
rcp, rlogin, and a few
other less common programs. The MIT port also
contains a full suite of Kerberos
client applications.User configuration files: .k5login and .k5users.k5login.k5usersUsers within a realm typically have their
Kerberos principal (such as
tillman@EXAMPLE.ORG) mapped to a local
user account (such as a local account named
tillman). Client applications such as
telnet usually do not require a user name
or a principal.Occasionally, however, you want to grant access to a local
user account to someone who does not have a matching
Kerberos principal. For example,
tillman@EXAMPLE.ORG may need access to the
local user account webdevelopers. Other
principals may also need access to that local account.The .k5login and
.k5users files, placed in a users home
directory, can be used similar to a powerful combination of
.hosts and .rhosts,
solving this problem. For example, if a
.k5login with the following
contents:tillman@example.org
jdoe@example.orgWere to be placed into the home directory of the local user
webdevelopers then both principals listed
would have access to that account without requiring a shared
password.Reading the manual pages for these commands is recommended.
Note that the ksu manual page covers
.k5users.Kerberos Tips, Tricks, and TroubleshootingKerberos5troubleshootingWhen using either the Heimdal or MIT
Kerberos ports ensure that your
PATH environment variable lists the
Kerberos versions of the client
applications before the system versions.Do all the computers in your realm have synchronized
time settings? If not, authentication may fail.
describes how to synchronize
clocks using NTP.MIT and Heimdal inter-operate nicely.
Except for kadmin, the protocol for
which is not standardized.If you change your hostname, you also need to change your
host/ principal and update your keytab.
This also applies to special keytab entries like the
www/ principal used for Apache's
www/mod_auth_kerb.All hosts in your realm must be resolvable (both forwards
and reverse) in DNS (or
/etc/hosts as a minimum). CNAMEs
will work, but the A and PTR records must be correct and in
place. The error message is not very intuitive:
Kerberos5 refuses authentication because Read req
failed: Key table entry not found.Some operating systems that may being acting as clients
to your KDC do not set the permissions
for ksu to be setuid
root. This means that
ksu does not work, which is a good
security idea but annoying. This is not a
KDC error.With MIT
Kerberos, if you want to allow a
principal to have a ticket life longer than the default ten
hours, you must use modify_principal in
kadmin to change the maxlife of both the
principal in question and the krbtgt
principal. Then the principal can use the
-l option with kinit
to request a ticket with a longer lifetime.If you run a packet sniffer on your
KDC to add in troubleshooting and then
run kinit from a workstation, you will
notice that your TGT is sent
immediately upon running kinit —
even before you type your password! The explanation is
that the Kerberos server freely
transmits a TGT (Ticket Granting
Ticket) to any unauthorized request; however, every
TGT is encrypted in a key derived from
the user's password. Therefore, when a user types their
password it is not being sent to the KDC,
it is being used to decrypt the TGT that
kinit already obtained. If the decryption
process results in a valid ticket with a valid time stamp,
the user has valid Kerberos
credentials. These credentials include a session key for
establishing secure communications with the
Kerberos server in the future, as
well as the actual ticket-granting ticket, which is actually
encrypted with the Kerberos
server's own key. This second layer of encryption is
unknown to the user, but it is what allows the
Kerberos server to verify
the authenticity of each TGT.If you want to use long ticket lifetimes (a week, for
example) and you are using OpenSSH
to connect to the machine where your ticket is stored, make
sure that Kerberos
is set to no
in your sshd_config or else your tickets
will be deleted when you log out.Remember that host principals can have a longer ticket
lifetime as well. If your user principal has a lifetime of a
week but the host you are connecting to has a lifetime of nine
hours, you will have an expired host principal in your cache
and the ticket cache will not work as expected.When setting up a krb5.dict file to
prevent specific bad passwords from being used (the manual page
for kadmind covers this briefly), remember
that it only applies to principals that have a password policy
assigned to them. The krb5.dict files
format is simple: one string per line. Creating a symbolic
link to /usr/share/dict/words might be
useful.Differences with the MIT portThe major difference between the MIT
and Heimdal installs relates to the kadmin
program which has a different (but equivalent) set of commands
and uses a different protocol. This has a large implications
if your KDC is MIT as you
will not be able to use the Heimdal kadmin
program to administer your KDC remotely
(or vice versa, for that matter).The client applications may also take slightly different
command line options to accomplish the same tasks. Following
the instructions on the MIT
Kerberos web site
()
is recommended. Be careful of path issues: the
MIT port installs into
/usr/local/ by default, and the
normal system applications may be run instead
of MIT if your PATH
environment variable lists the system directories first.With the MIT
security/krb5 port
that is provided by &os;, be sure to read the
/usr/local/share/doc/krb5/README.FreeBSD
file installed by the port if you want to understand why logins
via telnetd and klogind
behave somewhat oddly. Most importantly, correcting the
incorrect permissions on cache file behavior
requires that the login.krb5 binary be used
for authentication so that it can properly change ownership for
the forwarded credentials.Mitigating limitations found in KerberosKerberos5limitations and shortcomingsKerberos is an all-or-nothing approachEvery service enabled on the network must be modified to
work with Kerberos (or be otherwise
secured against network attacks) or else the users credentials
could be stolen and re-used. An example of this would be
Kerberos enabling all remote shells
(via rsh and telnet, for
example) but not converting the POP3 mail
server which sends passwords in plain text.Kerberos is intended for single-user workstationsIn a multi-user environment,
Kerberos is less secure.
This is because it stores the tickets in the
/tmp directory, which is readable by all
users. If a user is sharing a computer with several other
people simultaneously (i.e. multi-user), it is possible that
the user's tickets can be stolen (copied) by another
user.This can be overcome with the -c
filename command-line option or (preferably) the
KRB5CCNAME environment variable, but this
is rarely done. In principal, storing the ticket in the users
home directory and using simple file permissions can mitigate
this problem.The KDC is a single point of failureBy design, the KDC must be as secure as
the master password database is contained on it. The
KDC should have absolutely no other
services running on it and should be physically secured. The
danger is high because Kerberos
stores all passwords encrypted with the same key (the
master key), which in turn is stored as a file
on the KDC.As a side note, a compromised master key is not quite as
bad as one might normally fear. The master key is only used
to encrypt the Kerberos database
and as a seed for the random number generator. As long as
access to your KDC is secure, an attacker
cannot do much with the master key.Additionally, if the KDC is unavailable
(perhaps due to a denial of service attack or network problems)
the network services are unusable as authentication can not be
performed, a recipe for a denial-of-service attack. This can
alleviated with multiple KDCs (a single
master and one or more slaves) and with careful implementation
of secondary or fall-back authentication
(PAM is excellent for this).Kerberos ShortcomingsKerberos allows users, hosts
and services to authenticate between themselves. It does not
have a mechanism to authenticate the KDC
to the users, hosts or services. This means that a trojanned
kinit (for example) could record all user
names and passwords. Something like
security/tripwire or
other file system integrity checking tools can alleviate
this.Resources and further informationKerberos5external resources
The Kerberos FAQDesigning
an Authentication System: a Dialog in Four ScenesRFC 1510,
The Kerberos Network Authentication Service
(V5)MIT
Kerberos home pageHeimdal
Kerberos home pageTomRhodesWritten by: OpenSSLsecurityOpenSSLOne feature that many users overlook is the
OpenSSL toolkit included
in &os;. OpenSSL provides an
encryption transport layer on top of the normal communications
layer; thus allowing it to be intertwined with many network
applications and services.Some uses of OpenSSL may include
encrypted authentication of mail clients, web based transactions
such as credit card payments and more. Many ports such as
www/apache13-ssl, and
mail/sylpheed-claws
will offer compilation support for building with
OpenSSL.In most cases the Ports Collection will attempt to build
the security/openssl port
unless the WITH_OPENSSL_BASE make variable
is explicitly set to yes.The version of OpenSSL included
in &os; supports Secure Sockets Layer v2/v3 (SSLv2/SSLv3),
Transport Layer Security v1 (TLSv1) network security protocols
and can be used as a general cryptographic library.While OpenSSL supports the
IDEA algorithm, it is disabled by default
due to United States patents. To use it, the license should
be reviewed and, if the restrictions are acceptable, the
MAKE_IDEA variable must be set in
make.conf.One of the most common uses of
OpenSSL is to provide certificates for
use with software applications. These certificates ensure
that the credentials of the company or individual are valid
and not fraudulent. If the certificate in question has
not been verified by one of the several Certificate Authorities,
or CAs, a warning is usually produced. A
Certificate Authority is a company, such as VeriSign, which will
sign certificates in order to validate credentials of individuals
or companies. This process has a cost associated with it and
is definitely not a requirement for using certificates; however,
it can put some of the more paranoid users at ease.Generating CertificatesOpenSSLcertificate generationTo generate a certificate, the following command is
available:&prompt.root; openssl req -new -nodes -out req.pem -keyout cert.pem
Generating a 1024 bit RSA private key
................++++++
.......................................++++++
writing new private key to 'cert.pem'
-----
You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated
into your certificate request.
What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN.
There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank
For some fields there will be a default value,
If you enter '.', the field will be left blank.
-----
Country Name (2 letter code) [AU]:US
State or Province Name (full name) [Some-State]:PA
Locality Name (eg, city) []:Pittsburgh
Organization Name (eg, company) [Internet Widgits Pty Ltd]:My Company
Organizational Unit Name (eg, section) []:Systems Administrator
Common Name (eg, YOUR name) []:localhost.example.org
Email Address []:trhodes@FreeBSD.org
Please enter the following 'extra' attributes
to be sent with your certificate request
A challenge password []:SOME PASSWORD
An optional company name []:Another NameNotice the response directly after the
Common Name prompt shows a domain name.
This prompt requires a server name to be entered for
verification purposes; placing anything but a domain name
would yield a useless certificate. Other options, for
instance expire time, alternate encryption algorithms, etc.
are available. A complete list may be obtained by viewing
the &man.openssl.1; manual page.A cert.pem file should now exist in
the directory which the aforementioned command was issued. This
is the certificate which may be sent to any
CA for signing.In cases where a signature from a CA is
not required, a self signed certificate can be created. First,
generate the RSA key:&prompt.root; openssl dsaparam -rand -genkey -out
myRSA.key 1024Next, generate the CA key:&prompt.root; openssl gendsa -des3 -out \
myca.keymyRSA.keyUse this key to create the certificate:&prompt.root; openssl req -new -x509 -days 365 -key \
myca.key -out new.crtTwo new files should appear in the directory: a certificate
authority signature file, myca.key and the
certificate itself, new.crt. These should
be placed in a directory, preferably under
/etc, which is readable
only by root. Permissions of 0700 should be fine for this and
they can be set with the chmod
utility.Using Certificates, an ExampleSo what can these files do? A good use would be to
encrypt connections to the Sendmail
MTA. This would dissolve the use of clear
text authentication for users who send mail via the local
MTA.This is not the best use in the world as some
MUAs will present the user with an
error if they have not installed the certificate locally.
Refer to the documentation included with the software for
more information on certificate installation.The following lines should be placed inside the
local .mc file:dnl SSL Options
define(`confCACERT_PATH',`/etc/certs')dnl
define(`confCACERT',`/etc/certs/new.crt')dnl
define(`confSERVER_CERT',`/etc/certs/new.crt')dnl
define(`confSERVER_KEY',`/etc/certs/myca.key')dnl
define(`confTLS_SRV_OPTIONS', `V')dnlWhere /etc/certs/
is the directory to be used for storing the certificate
and key files locally. The last few requirements are a rebuild
of the local .cf file. This is easily
achieved by typing makeinstall within the
/etc/mail
directory. Follow that up with makerestart which should start the
Sendmail daemon.If all went well there will be no error messages in the
/var/log/maillog file and
Sendmail will show up in the process
list.For a simple test, simply connect to the mail server
using the &man.telnet.1; utility:&prompt.root; telnet example.com 25
Trying 192.0.34.166...
Connected to example.com.
Escape character is '^]'.
220 example.com ESMTP Sendmail 8.12.10/8.12.10; Tue, 31 Aug 2004 03:41:22 -0400 (EDT)
ehlo example.com
250-example.com Hello example.com [192.0.34.166], pleased to meet you
250-ENHANCEDSTATUSCODES
250-PIPELINING
250-8BITMIME
250-SIZE
250-DSN
250-ETRN
250-AUTH LOGIN PLAIN
250-STARTTLS
250-DELIVERBY
250 HELP
quit
221 2.0.0 example.com closing connection
Connection closed by foreign host.If the STARTTLS line appears in the output
then everything is working correctly.NikClaytonnik@FreeBSD.orgWritten by IPsecVPN over IPsecCreating a VPN between two networks, separated by the
Internet, using FreeBSD gateways.Hiten M.Pandyahmp@FreeBSD.orgWritten by Understanding IPsecThis section will guide you through the process of setting
up IPsec, and to use it in an environment which consists of
FreeBSD and µsoft.windows; 2000/XP
machines, to make them communicate securely. In order to set up
IPsec, it is necessary that you are familiar with the concepts
of building a custom kernel (see
).IPsec is a protocol which sits on top
of the Internet Protocol (IP) layer. It allows two or more
hosts to communicate in a secure manner (hence the name). The
FreeBSD IPsec network stack is based on the
KAME implementation,
which has support for both protocol families, IPv4 and
IPv6.FreeBSD 5.X contains a hardware
accelerated IPsec stack, known as Fast
IPsec, that was obtained from OpenBSD. It employs
cryptographic hardware (whenever possible) via the
&man.crypto.4; subsystem to optimize the performance of IPsec.
This subsystem is new, and does not support all the features
that are available in the KAME version of IPsec. However, in
order to enable hardware-accelerated IPsec, the following
kernel option has to be added to your kernel configuration
file:kernel optionsFAST_IPSEC
options FAST_IPSEC # new IPsec (cannot define w/ IPSEC)
Note, that it is not currently possible to use the
Fast IPsec subsystem in lue with the KAME
implementation of IPsec. Consult the &man.fast.ipsec.4;
manual page for more information.IPsecESPIPsecAHIPsec consists of two sub-protocols:Encapsulated Security Payload
(ESP), protects the IP packet data from third
party interference, by encrypting the contents using
symmetric cryptography algorithms (like Blowfish,
3DES).Authentication Header (AH),
protects the IP packet header from third party interference
and spoofing, by computing a cryptographic checksum and
hashing the IP packet header fields with a secure hashing
function. This is then followed by an additional header
that contains the hash, to allow the information in the
packet to be authenticated.ESP and AH can
either be used together or separately, depending on the
environment.VPNvirtual private networkVPNIPsec can either be used to directly encrypt the traffic
between two hosts (known as Transport
Mode); or to build virtual tunnels
between two subnets, which could be used for secure
communication between two corporate networks (known as
Tunnel Mode). The latter is more commonly
known as a Virtual Private Network (VPN).
The &man.ipsec.4; manual page should be consulted for detailed
information on the IPsec subsystem in FreeBSD.To add IPsec support to your kernel, add the following
options to your kernel configuration file:kernel optionsIPSECkernel optionsIPSEC_ESP
options IPSEC #IP security
options IPSEC_ESP #IP security (crypto; define w/ IPSEC)
kernel optionsIPSEC_DEBUGIf IPsec debugging support is desired, the following
kernel option should also be added:
options IPSEC_DEBUG #debug for IP security
The ProblemThere is no standard for what constitutes a VPN. VPNs can
be implemented using a number of different technologies, each of
which have their own strengths and weaknesses. This section
presents a scenario, and the strategies used for implementing a
VPN for this scenario.The Scenario: Two networks, connected to the Internet, to
behave as oneVPNcreatingThe premise is as follows:You have at least two sitesBoth sites are using IP internallyBoth sites are connected to the Internet, through a
gateway that is running FreeBSD.The gateway on each network has at least one public IP
address.The internal addresses of the two networks can be
public or private IP addresses, it does not matter. You can
be running NAT on the gateway machine if necessary.The internal IP addresses of the two networks
do not collide. While I expect it is
theoretically possible to use a combination of VPN
technology and NAT to get this to work, I expect it to be a
configuration nightmare.If you find that you are trying to connect two networks,
both of which, internally, use the same private IP address range
(e.g. both of them use 192.168.1.x), then one of the networks will
have to be renumbered.The network topology might look something like this:Network #1 [ Internal Hosts ] Private Net, 192.168.1.2-254
[ Win9x/NT/2K ]
[ UNIX ]
|
|
.---[fxp1]---. Private IP, 192.168.1.1
| FreeBSD |
`---[fxp0]---' Public IP, A.B.C.D
|
|
-=-=- Internet -=-=-
|
|
.---[fxp0]---. Public IP, W.X.Y.Z
| FreeBSD |
`---[fxp1]---' Private IP, 192.168.2.1
|
|
Network #2 [ Internal Hosts ]
[ Win9x/NT/2K ] Private Net, 192.168.2.2-254
[ UNIX ]
- Notice the two public IP addresses. I'll use the letters to
+ Notice the two public IP addresses. I will use the letters to
refer to them in the rest of this article. Anywhere you see those
letters in this article, replace them with your own public IP
addresses. Note also that internally, the two gateway
machines have .1 IP addresses, and that the two networks have
different private IP addresses (192.168.1.x and 192.168.2.x respectively). All the
machines on the private networks have been configured to use the
.1 machine as their default
gateway.The intention is that, from a network point of view, each
network should view the machines on the other network as though
they were directly attached the same router -- albeit a slightly
slow router with an occasional tendency to drop packets.This means that (for example), machine 192.168.1.20 should be able to runping 192.168.2.34and have it work, transparently. &windows; machines should
be able to see the machines on the other network, browse file
shares, and so on, in exactly the same way that they can browse
machines on the local network.And the whole thing has to be secure. This means that
traffic between the two networks has to be encrypted.Creating a VPN between these two networks is a multi-step
process. The stages are as follows:Create a virtual network link between the two
networks, across the Internet. Test it, using tools like
&man.ping.8;, to make sure it works.Apply security policies to ensure that traffic between
the two networks is transparently encrypted and decrypted as
necessary. Test this, using tools like &man.tcpdump.1;, to
ensure that traffic is encrypted.Configure additional software on the FreeBSD gateways,
to allow &windows; machines to see one another across the
VPN.Step 1: Creating and testing a virtual
network linkSuppose that you were logged in to the gateway machine on
network #1 (with public IP address A.B.C.D, private IP address 192.168.1.1), and you ran ping
192.168.2.1, which is the private address of the machine
with IP address W.X.Y.Z. What
needs to happen in order for this to work?The gateway machine needs to know how to reach 192.168.2.1. In other words, it needs
to have a route to 192.168.2.1.Private IP addresses, such as those in the 192.168.x range are not supposed to
appear on the Internet at large. Instead, each packet you
send to 192.168.2.1 will need
to be wrapped up inside another packet. This packet will need
to appear to be from A.B.C.D,
and it will have to be sent to W.X.Y.Z. This process is called
encapsulation.Once this packet arrives at W.X.Y.Z it will need to
unencapsulated, and delivered to 192.168.2.1.You can think of this as requiring a tunnel
between the two networks. The two tunnel mouths are the IP
addresses A.B.C.D and W.X.Y.Z, and the tunnel must be told the
addresses of the private IP addresses that will be allowed to pass
through it. The tunnel is used to transfer traffic with private
IP addresses across the public Internet.This tunnel is created by using the generic interface, or
gif devices on FreeBSD. As you can
imagine, the gif interface on each
gateway host must be configured with four IP addresses; two for
the public IP addresses, and two for the private IP
addresses.Support for the gif device must be compiled in to the
&os; kernel on both machines. You can do this by adding the
line:pseudo-device gifto the kernel configuration files on both machines, and
then compile, install, and reboot as normal.Configuring the tunnel is a two step process. First the
tunnel must be told what the outside (or public) IP addresses
are, using &man.gifconfig.8;. Then the private IP addresses must be
configured using &man.ifconfig.8;.In &os; 5.X, the functionality provided by the
&man.gifconfig.8; utility has been merged into
&man.ifconfig.8;.On the gateway machine on network #1 you would run the
following two commands to configure the tunnel.gifconfig gif0 A.B.C.D W.X.Y.Z
ifconfig gif0 inet 192.168.1.1 192.168.2.1 netmask 0xffffffff
On the other gateway machine you run the same commands,
but with the order of the IP addresses reversed.gifconfig gif0 W.X.Y.Z A.B.C.D
ifconfig gif0 inet 192.168.2.1 192.168.1.1 netmask 0xffffffff
You can then run:gifconfig gif0to see the configuration. For example, on the network #1
gateway, you would see this:&prompt.root; gifconfig gif0
gif0: flags=8011<UP,POINTTOPOINT,MULTICAST> mtu 1280
inet 192.168.1.1 --> 192.168.2.1 netmask 0xffffffff
physical address inet A.B.C.D --> W.X.Y.Z
As you can see, a tunnel has been created between the
physical addresses A.B.C.D and
W.X.Y.Z, and the traffic allowed
through the tunnel is that between 192.168.1.1 and 192.168.2.1.This will also have added an entry to the routing table
on both machines, which you can examine with the command netstat -rn.
This output is from the gateway host on network #1.&prompt.root; netstat -rn
Routing tables
Internet:
Destination Gateway Flags Refs Use Netif Expire
...
192.168.2.1 192.168.1.1 UH 0 0 gif0
...
As the Flags value indicates, this is a
host route, which means that each gateway knows how to reach the
other gateway, but they do not know how to reach the rest of
their respective networks. That problem will be fixed
shortly.It is likely that you are running a firewall on both
machines. This will need to be circumvented for your VPN
traffic. You might want to allow all traffic between both
networks, or you might want to include firewall rules that
protect both ends of the VPN from one another.It greatly simplifies testing if you configure the
firewall to allow all traffic through the VPN. You can always
tighten things up later. If you are using &man.ipfw.8; on the
gateway machines then a command likeipfw add 1 allow ip from any to any via gif0will allow all traffic between the two end points of the
VPN, without affecting your other firewall rules. Obviously
you will need to run this command on both gateway hosts.This is sufficient to allow each gateway machine to ping
the other. On 192.168.1.1, you
should be able to runping 192.168.2.1and get a response, and you should be able to do the same
thing on the other gateway machine.However, you will not be able to reach internal machines
on either network yet. This is because of the routing --
although the gateway machines know how to reach one another,
they do not know how to reach the network behind each one.To solve this problem you must add a static route on each
gateway machine. The command to do this on the first gateway
would be:route add 192.168.2.0 192.168.2.1 netmask 0xffffff00
This says In order to reach the hosts on the
network 192.168.2.0, send the
packets to the host 192.168.2.1. You will need to
run a similar command on the other gateway, but with the
192.168.1.x addresses
instead.IP traffic from hosts on one network will now be able to
reach hosts on the other network.That has now created two thirds of a VPN between the two
networks, in as much as it is virtual and it is a
network. It is not private yet. You can test
this using &man.ping.8; and &man.tcpdump.1;. Log in to the
gateway host and runtcpdump dst host 192.168.2.1In another log in session on the same host runping 192.168.2.1You will see output that looks something like this:
16:10:24.018080 192.168.1.1 > 192.168.2.1: icmp: echo request
16:10:24.018109 192.168.1.1 > 192.168.2.1: icmp: echo reply
16:10:25.018814 192.168.1.1 > 192.168.2.1: icmp: echo request
16:10:25.018847 192.168.1.1 > 192.168.2.1: icmp: echo reply
16:10:26.028896 192.168.1.1 > 192.168.2.1: icmp: echo request
16:10:26.029112 192.168.1.1 > 192.168.2.1: icmp: echo reply
As you can see, the ICMP messages are going back and forth
unencrypted. If you had used the parameter to
&man.tcpdump.1; to grab more bytes of data from the packets you
would see more information.Obviously this is unacceptable. The next section will
discuss securing the link between the two networks so that it
all traffic is automatically encrypted.Summary:Configure both kernels with pseudo-device
gif.Edit /etc/rc.conf on gateway host
#1 and add the following lines (replacing IP addresses as
necessary).gifconfig_gif0="A.B.C.D W.X.Y.Z"
ifconfig_gif0="inet 192.168.1.1 192.168.2.1 netmask 0xffffffff"
static_routes="vpn"
route_vpn="192.168.2.0 192.168.2.1 netmask 0xffffff00"
Edit your firewall script
(/etc/rc.firewall, or similar) on both
hosts, and addipfw add 1 allow ip from any to any via gif0Make similar changes to
/etc/rc.conf on gateway host #2,
reversing the order of IP addresses.Step 2: Securing the linkTo secure the link we will be using IPsec. IPsec provides
a mechanism for two hosts to agree on an encryption key, and to
then use this key in order to encrypt data between the two
hosts.The are two areas of configuration to be considered here.There must be a mechanism for two hosts to agree on the
encryption mechanism to use. Once two hosts have agreed on
this mechanism there is said to be a security association
between them.There must be a mechanism for specifying which traffic
should be encrypted. Obviously, you do not want to encrypt
all your outgoing traffic -- you only want to encrypt the
traffic that is part of the VPN. The rules that you put in
place to determine what traffic will be encrypted are called
security policies.Security associations and security policies are both
maintained by the kernel, and can be modified by userland
programs. However, before you can do this you must configure the
kernel to support IPsec and the Encapsulated Security Payload
(ESP) protocol. This is done by configuring a kernel with:kernel optionsIPSECoptions IPSEC
options IPSEC_ESP
and recompiling, reinstalling, and rebooting. As before
you will need to do this to the kernels on both of the gateway
hosts.IKEYou have two choices when it comes to setting up security
associations. You can configure them by hand between two hosts,
which entails choosing the encryption algorithm, encryption keys,
and so forth, or you can use daemons that implement the Internet
Key Exchange protocol (IKE) to do this for you.I recommend the latter. Apart from anything else, it is
easier to set up.IPsecsecurity policiessetkeyEditing and displaying security policies is carried out
using &man.setkey.8;. By analogy, setkey is
to the kernel's security policy tables as &man.route.8; is to
the kernel's routing tables. setkey can
also display the current security associations, and to continue
the analogy further, is akin to netstat -r
in that respect.There are a number of choices for daemons to manage
security associations with FreeBSD. This article will describe
how to use one of these, racoon. racoon is in the FreeBSD ports
collection, in the security/ category, and is installed in the
usual way.racoonracoon must be run on both gateway hosts. On each host it
is configured with the IP address of the other end of the VPN,
and a secret key (which you choose, and must be the same on both
gateways).The two daemons then contact one another, confirm that they
are who they say they are (by using the secret key that you
configured). The daemons then generate a new secret key, and use
this to encrypt the traffic over the VPN. They periodically
change this secret, so that even if an attacker were to crack one
of the keys (which is as theoretically close to unfeasible as it
gets) it will not do them much good -- by the time they have cracked
the key the two daemons have chosen another one.racoon's configuration is stored in
${PREFIX}/etc/racoon. You should find a
configuration file there, which should not need to be changed
too much. The other component of racoon's configuration,
which you will need to change, is the pre-shared
key.The default racoon configuration expects to find this in
the file ${PREFIX}/etc/racoon/psk.txt. It is important to note
that the pre-shared key is not the key that will be used to
encrypt your traffic across the VPN link, it is simply a token
that allows the key management daemons to trust one another.psk.txt contains a line for each
remote site you are dealing with. In this example, where there
are two sites, each psk.txt file will contain one line (because
each end of the VPN is only dealing with one other end).On gateway host #1 this line should look like this:W.X.Y.Z secretThat is, the public IP address of the remote end,
whitespace, and a text string that provides the secret.
- Obviously, you shouldn't use secret as your key -- the normal
+ Obviously, you should not use secret as your key -- the normal
rules for choosing a password apply.On gateway host #2 the line would look like thisA.B.C.D secretThat is, the public IP address of the remote end, and the
same secret key. psk.txt must be mode
0600 (i.e., only read/write to
root) before racoon will run.You must run racoon on both gateway machines. You will
also need to add some firewall rules to allow the IKE traffic,
which is carried over UDP to the ISAKMP (Internet Security Association
Key Management Protocol) port. Again, this should be fairly early in
your firewall ruleset.ipfw add 1 allow udp from A.B.C.D to W.X.Y.Z isakmp
ipfw add 1 allow udp from W.X.Y.Z to A.B.C.D isakmp
Once racoon is running you can try pinging one gateway host
from the other. The connection is still not encrypted, but
racoon will then set up the security associations between the two
hosts -- this might take a moment, and you may see this as a
short delay before the ping commands start responding.Once the security association has been set up you can
view it using &man.setkey.8;. Runsetkey -Don either host to view the security association information.That's one half of the problem. They other half is setting
your security policies.To create a sensible security policy, let's review what's
been set up so far. This discussions hold for both ends of the
link.Each IP packet that you send out has a header that contains
data about the packet. The header includes the IP addresses of
both the source and destination. As we already know, private IP
addresses, such as the 192.168.x.y
range are not supposed to appear on the public Internet.
Instead, they must first be encapsulated inside another packet.
This packet must have the public source and destination IP
addresses substituted for the private addresses.So if your outgoing packet started looking like this:
.----------------------.
| Src: 192.168.1.1 |
| Dst: 192.168.2.1 |
| <other header info> |
+----------------------+
| <packet data> |
`----------------------'Then it will be encapsulated inside another packet, looking
something like this:
.--------------------------.
| Src: A.B.C.D |
| Dst: W.X.Y.Z |
| <other header info> |
+--------------------------+
| .----------------------. |
| | Src: 192.168.1.1 | |
| | Dst: 192.168.2.1 | |
| | <other header info> | |
| +----------------------+ |
| | <packet data> | |
| `----------------------' |
`--------------------------'This encapsulation is carried out by the
gif device. As
you can see, the packet now has real IP addresses on the outside,
and our original packet has been wrapped up as data inside the
packet that will be put out on the Internet.Obviously, we want all traffic between the VPNs to be
encrypted. You might try putting this in to words, as:If a packet leaves from A.B.C.D, and it is destined for W.X.Y.Z, then encrypt it, using the
necessary security associations.If a packet arrives from W.X.Y.Z, and it is destined for A.B.C.D, then decrypt it, using the
necessary security associations.That's close, but not quite right. If you did this, all
traffic to and from W.X.Y.Z, even
traffic that was not part of the VPN, would be encrypted. That's
not quite what you want. The correct policy is as followsIf a packet leaves from A.B.C.D, and that packet is encapsulating
another packet, and it is destined for W.X.Y.Z, then encrypt it, using the
necessary security associations.If a packet arrives from W.X.Y.Z, and that packet is encapsulating
another packet, and it is destined for A.B.C.D, then decrypt it, using the
necessary security associations.A subtle change, but a necessary one.Security policies are also set using &man.setkey.8;.
&man.setkey.8; features a configuration language for defining the
policy. You can either enter configuration instructions via
stdin, or you can use the option to specify a
filename that contains configuration instructions.The configuration on gateway host #1 (which has the public
IP address A.B.C.D) to force all
outbound traffic to W.X.Y.Z to be
encrypted is:
spdadd A.B.C.D/32 W.X.Y.Z/32 ipencap -P out ipsec esp/tunnel/A.B.C.D-W.X.Y.Z/require;
Put these commands in a file (e.g.
/etc/ipsec.conf) and then run&prompt.root; setkey -f /etc/ipsec.conf tells &man.setkey.8; that we want
to add a rule to the secure policy database. The rest of this
line specifies which packets will match this policy. A.B.C.D/32 and W.X.Y.Z/32 are the IP addresses and
netmasks that identify the network or hosts that this policy will
apply to. In this case, we want it to apply to traffic between
these two hosts. tells the kernel that
this policy should only apply to packets that encapsulate other
packets. says that this policy applies
to outgoing packets, and says that the
packet will be secured.The second line specifies how this packet will be
encrypted. is the protocol that will be
used, while indicates that the packet
will be further encapsulated in an IPsec packet. The repeated
use of A.B.C.D and W.X.Y.Z is used to select the security
association to use, and the final
mandates that packets must be encrypted if they match this
rule.This rule only matches outgoing packets. You will need a
similar rule to match incoming packets.spdadd W.X.Y.Z/32 A.B.C.D/32 ipencap -P in ipsec esp/tunnel/W.X.Y.Z-A.B.C.D/require;Note the instead of
in this case, and the necessary reversal of
the IP addresses.The other gateway host (which has the public IP address
W.X.Y.Z) will need similar rules.spdadd W.X.Y.Z/32 A.B.C.D/32 ipencap -P out ipsec esp/tunnel/W.X.Y.Z-A.B.C.D/require;
spdadd A.B.C.D/32 W.X.Y.Z/32 ipencap -P in ipsec esp/tunnel/A.B.C.D-W.X.Y.Z/require;Finally, you need to add firewall rules to allow ESP and
IPENCAP packets back and forth. These rules will need to be
added to both hosts.ipfw add 1 allow esp from A.B.C.D to W.X.Y.Z
ipfw add 1 allow esp from W.X.Y.Z to A.B.C.D
ipfw add 1 allow ipencap from A.B.C.D to W.X.Y.Z
ipfw add 1 allow ipencap from W.X.Y.Z to A.B.C.D
Because the rules are symmetric you can use the same rules
on each gateway host.Outgoing packets will now look something like this:
.------------------------------. --------------------------.
| Src: A.B.C.D | |
| Dst: W.X.Y.Z | |
| <other header info> | | Encrypted
+------------------------------+ | packet.
| .--------------------------. | -------------. | contents
| | Src: A.B.C.D | | | | are
| | Dst: W.X.Y.Z | | | | completely
| | <other header info> | | | |- secure
| +--------------------------+ | | Encap'd | from third
| | .----------------------. | | -. | packet | party
| | | Src: 192.168.1.1 | | | | Original |- with real | snooping
| | | Dst: 192.168.2.1 | | | | packet, | IP addr |
| | | <other header info> | | | |- private | |
| | +----------------------+ | | | IP addr | |
| | | <packet data> | | | | | |
| | `----------------------' | | -' | |
| `--------------------------' | -------------' |
`------------------------------' --------------------------'
When they are received by the far end of the VPN they will
first be decrypted (using the security associations that have
been negotiated by racoon). Then they will enter the
gif interface, which will unwrap
the second layer, until you are left with the innermost
packet, which can then travel in to the inner network.You can check the security using the same &man.ping.8; test from
earlier. First, log in to the
A.B.C.D gateway machine, and
run:tcpdump dst host 192.168.2.1In another log in session on the same host runping 192.168.2.1This time you should see output like the following:XXX tcpdump outputNow, as you can see, &man.tcpdump.1; shows the ESP packets. If
you try to examine them with the option you will see
(apparently) gibberish, because of the encryption.Congratulations. You have just set up a VPN between two
remote sites.SummaryConfigure both kernels with:options IPSEC
options IPSEC_ESP
Install security/racoon. Edit
${PREFIX}/etc/racoon/psk.txt on both
gateway hosts, adding an entry for the remote host's IP
address and a secret key that they both know. Make sure
this file is mode 0600.Add the following lines to
/etc/rc.conf on each host:ipsec_enable="YES"
ipsec_file="/etc/ipsec.conf"
Create an /etc/ipsec.conf on each
host that contains the necessary spdadd lines. On gateway
host #1 this would be:
spdadd A.B.C.D/32 W.X.Y.Z/32 ipencap -P out ipsec
esp/tunnel/A.B.C.D-W.X.Y.Z/require;
spdadd W.X.Y.Z/32 A.B.C.D/32 ipencap -P in ipsec
esp/tunnel/W.X.Y.Z-A.B.C.D/require;
On gateway host #2 this would be:
spdadd W.X.Y.Z/32 A.B.C.D/32 ipencap -P out ipsec
esp/tunnel/W.X.Y.Z-A.B.C.D/require;
spdadd A.B.C.D/32 W.X.Y.Z/32 ipencap -P in ipsec
esp/tunnel/A.B.C.D-W.X.Y.Z/require;
Add firewall rules to allow IKE, ESP, and IPENCAP
traffic to both hosts:
ipfw add 1 allow udp from A.B.C.D to W.X.Y.Z isakmp
ipfw add 1 allow udp from W.X.Y.Z to A.B.C.D isakmp
ipfw add 1 allow esp from A.B.C.D to W.X.Y.Z
ipfw add 1 allow esp from W.X.Y.Z to A.B.C.D
ipfw add 1 allow ipencap from A.B.C.D to W.X.Y.Z
ipfw add 1 allow ipencap from W.X.Y.Z to A.B.C.D
The previous two steps should suffice to get the VPN up and
running. Machines on each network will be able to refer to one
another using IP addresses, and all traffic across the link will
be automatically and securely encrypted.ChernLeeContributed by OpenSSHOpenSSHsecurityOpenSSHOpenSSH is a set of network connectivity tools used to
access remote machines securely. It can be used as a direct
replacement for rlogin,
rsh, rcp, and
telnet. Additionally, any other TCP/IP
connections can be tunneled/forwarded securely through SSH.
OpenSSH encrypts all traffic to effectively eliminate eavesdropping,
connection hijacking, and other network-level attacks.OpenSSH is maintained by the OpenBSD project, and is based
upon SSH v1.2.12 with all the recent bug fixes and updates. It
is compatible with both SSH protocols 1 and 2. OpenSSH has been
in the base system since FreeBSD 4.0.Advantages of Using OpenSSHNormally, when using &man.telnet.1; or &man.rlogin.1;,
data is sent over the network in an clear, un-encrypted form.
Network sniffers anywhere in between the client and server can
steal your user/password information or data transferred in
your session. OpenSSH offers a variety of authentication and
encryption methods to prevent this from happening.Enabling sshdOpenSSHenablingBe sure to make the following addition to your
rc.conf file:sshd_enable="YES"This will load &man.sshd.8;, the daemon program for OpenSSH,
the next time your system initializes. Alternatively, you can
simply run directly the sshd daemon by typing sshd on the command line.SSH ClientOpenSSHclientThe &man.ssh.1; utility works similarly to
&man.rlogin.1;.&prompt.root; ssh user@example.com
Host key not found from the list of known hosts.
Are you sure you want to continue connecting (yes/no)? yes
Host 'example.com' added to the list of known hosts.
user@example.com's password: *******The login will continue just as it would have if a session was
created using rlogin or
telnet. SSH utilizes a key fingerprint
system for verifying the authenticity of the server when the
client connects. The user is prompted to enter
yes only when
connecting for the first time. Future attempts to login are all
verified against the saved fingerprint key. The SSH client
will alert you if the saved fingerprint differs from the
received fingerprint on future login attempts. The fingerprints
are saved in ~/.ssh/known_hosts, or
~/.ssh/known_hosts2 for SSH v2
fingerprints.By default, OpenSSH servers are configured to only accept
SSH v2 connections. The client, however, can choose
between version 1 and 2. Version 2 is known to be more robust and
secure than its predecessor.The &man.ssh.1; command can be forced to use either protocol
by passing it the or argument
for v1 and v2, respectively.Secure CopyOpenSSHsecure copyscpThe &man.scp.1; command works similarly to
&man.rcp.1;; it copies a file to or from a remote machine,
except in a secure fashion.&prompt.root; scp user@example.com:/COPYRIGHT COPYRIGHT
user@example.com's password: *******
COPYRIGHT 100% |*****************************| 4735
00:00
&prompt.root;Since the fingerprint was already saved for this host in the
previous example, it is verified when using &man.scp.1;
here.The arguments passed to &man.scp.1; are similar
to &man.cp.1;, with the file or files in the first
argument, and the destination in the second. Since the file is
fetched over the network, through SSH, one or more of the file
arguments takes on the form
.ConfigurationOpenSSHconfigurationThe system-wide configuration files for both the
OpenSSH daemon and client reside
within the /etc/ssh directory.ssh_config configures the client
settings, while sshd_config configures the
daemon.Additionally, the
(/usr/sbin/sshd by default), and
rc.conf
options can provide more levels of configuration.ssh-keygenInstead of using passwords, &man.ssh-keygen.1; can
be used to generate RSA keys to authenticate a user:&prompt.user; ssh-keygen -t rsa1
Initializing random number generator...
Generating p: .++ (distance 66)
Generating q: ..............................++ (distance 498)
Computing the keys...
Key generation complete.
Enter file in which to save the key (/home/user/.ssh/identity):
Enter passphrase:
Enter the same passphrase again:
Your identification has been saved in /home/user/.ssh/identity.
...&man.ssh-keygen.1; will create a public and private
key pair for use in authentication. The private key is stored in
~/.ssh/identity, whereas the public key is
stored in ~/.ssh/identity.pub. The public
key must be placed in ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
of the remote machine in order for the setup to work.This will allow connection to the remote machine based upon
RSA authentication instead of passwords.The option will create RSA
keys for use by SSH protocol version 1. If you want to use
RSA keys with the SSH protocol version 2, you have to use the
command ssh-keygen -t rsa.If a passphrase is used in &man.ssh-keygen.1;, the user
will be prompted for a password each time in order to use the private
key.A SSH protocol version 2 DSA key can be created for the same purpose by using
the ssh-keygen -t dsa command.
This will
create a public/private DSA key for use in SSH protocol version 2 sessions only.
The public key is stored in ~/.ssh/id_dsa.pub,
while the private key is in ~/.ssh/id_dsa.DSA public keys are also placed in
~/.ssh/authorized_keys on the remote
machine.&man.ssh-agent.1; and &man.ssh-add.1; are
utilities used in managing multiple passworded private keys.The various options and files can be different
according to the OpenSSH version you have on your system, to
avoid problems you should consult the &man.ssh-keygen.1;
manual page.SSH TunnelingOpenSSHtunnelingOpenSSH has the ability to create a tunnel to encapsulate
another protocol in an encrypted session.The following command tells &man.ssh.1; to create a tunnel
for telnet:&prompt.user; ssh -2 -N -f -L 5023:localhost:23 user@foo.example.com
&prompt.user;The ssh command is used with the
following options:Forces ssh to use version 2 of
the protocol. (Do not use if you are working with older
SSH servers)Indicates no command, or tunnel only. If omitted,
ssh would initiate a normal
session.Forces ssh to run in the
background.Indicates a local tunnel in
localport:remotehost:remoteport
fashion.The remote SSH server.An SSH tunnel works by creating a listen socket on
localhost on the specified port.
It then forwards any connection received
on the local host/port via the SSH connection to the specified
remote host and port.In the example, port 5023 on
localhost is being forwarded to port
23 on localhost
of the remote machine. Since 23 is telnet,
this would create a secure telnet session through an SSH tunnel.This can be used to wrap any number of insecure TCP
protocols such as SMTP, POP3, FTP, etc.Using SSH to Create a Secure Tunnel for SMTP&prompt.user; ssh -2 -N -f -L 5025:localhost:25 user@mailserver.example.com
user@mailserver.example.com's password: *****
&prompt.user; telnet localhost 5025
Trying 127.0.0.1...
Connected to localhost.
Escape character is '^]'.
220 mailserver.example.com ESMTPThis can be used in conjunction with an
&man.ssh-keygen.1; and additional user accounts to create a
more seamless/hassle-free SSH tunneling environment. Keys
can be used in place of typing a password, and the tunnels
can be run as a separate user.Practical SSH Tunneling ExamplesSecure Access of a POP3 ServerAt work, there is an SSH server that accepts
connections from the outside. On the same office network
resides a mail server running a POP3 server. The network,
or network path between your home and office may or may not
be completely trustable. Because of this, you need to check
your e-mail in a secure manner. The solution is to create
an SSH connection to your office's SSH server, and tunnel
through to the mail server.&prompt.user; ssh -2 -N -f -L 2110:mail.example.com:110 user@ssh-server.example.com
user@ssh-server.example.com's password: ******When the tunnel is up and running, you can point your
mail client to send POP3 requests to localhost
port 2110. A connection here will be forwarded securely across
the tunnel to mail.example.com.Bypassing a Draconian FirewallSome network administrators impose extremely draconian
firewall rules, filtering not only incoming connections,
but outgoing connections. You may be only given access
to contact remote machines on ports 22 and 80 for SSH
and web surfing.You may wish to access another (perhaps non-work
related) service, such as an Ogg Vorbis server to stream
music. If this Ogg Vorbis server is streaming on some other
port than 22 or 80, you will not be able to access it.The solution is to create an SSH connection to a machine
outside of your network's firewall, and use it to tunnel to
the Ogg Vorbis server.&prompt.user; ssh -2 -N -f -L 8888:music.example.com:8000 user@unfirewalled-system.example.org
user@unfirewalled-system.example.org's password: *******Your streaming client can now be pointed to
localhost port 8888, which will be
forwarded over to music.example.com port
8000, successfully evading the firewall.Further ReadingOpenSSH&man.ssh.1; &man.scp.1; &man.ssh-keygen.1;
&man.ssh-agent.1; &man.ssh-add.1;&man.sshd.8; &man.sftp-server.8;TomRhodesContributed by ACLFile System Access Control ListsIn conjunction with file system enhancements like snapshots, FreeBSD 5.0
and later offers the security of File System Access Control Lists
(ACLs).Access Control Lists extend the standard &unix;
permission model in a highly compatible (&posix;.1e) way. This feature
permits an administrator to make use of and take advantage of a
more sophisticated security model.To enable ACL support for UFS
file systems, the following:options UFS_ACLmust be compiled into the kernel. If this option has
not been compiled in, a warning message will be displayed
when attempting to mount a file system supporting ACLs.
This option is included in the GENERIC kernel.
ACLs rely on extended attributes being enabled on
the file system. Extended attributes are natively supported in the next generation
&unix; file system, UFS2.A higher level of administrative overhead is required to
configure extended attributes on UFS1 than on
UFS2. The performance of extended attributes
on UFS2 is also substantially higher. As a
result, UFS2 is generally recommended in preference
to UFS1 for use with access control lists.ACLs are enabled by the mount-time administrative
flag, , which may be added to /etc/fstab.
The mount-time flag can also be automatically set in a persistent manner using
&man.tunefs.8; to modify a superblock ACLs flag in the
file system header. In general, it is preferred to use the superblock flag
for several reasons:The mount-time ACLs flag cannot be changed by a
remount (&man.mount.8; ), only by means of a complete
&man.umount.8; and fresh &man.mount.8;. This means that
ACLs cannot be enabled on the root file system after boot.
It also means that you cannot change the disposition of a file system once
it is in use.Setting the superblock flag will cause the file system to always be
mounted with ACLs enabled even if there is not an
fstab entry or if the devices re-order. This prevents
accidental mounting of the file system without ACLs
enabled, which can result in ACLs being improperly enforced,
and hence security problems.We may change the ACLs behavior to allow the flag to
be enabled without a complete fresh &man.mount.8;, but we consider it desirable to
discourage accidental mounting without ACLs enabled, because you
can shoot your feet quite nastily if you enable ACLs, then disable
them, then re-enable them without flushing the extended attributes. In general, once
you have enabled ACLs on a file system, they should not be disabled,
as the resulting file protections may not be compatible with those intended by the
users of the system, and re-enabling ACLs may re-attach the previous
ACLs to files that have since had their permissions changed,
resulting in other unpredictable behavior.File systems with ACLs enabled will show a +
(plus) sign in their permission settings when viewed. For example:drwx------ 2 robert robert 512 Dec 27 11:54 private
drwxrwx---+ 2 robert robert 512 Dec 23 10:57 directory1
drwxrwx---+ 2 robert robert 512 Dec 22 10:20 directory2
drwxrwx---+ 2 robert robert 512 Dec 27 11:57 directory3
drwxr-xr-x 2 robert robert 512 Nov 10 11:54 public_htmlHere we see that the directory1,
directory2, and directory3
directories are all taking advantage of ACLs. The
public_html directory is not.Making Use of ACLsThe file system ACLs can be viewed by the
&man.getfacl.1; utility. For instance, to view the
ACL settings on the test
file, one would use the command:&prompt.user; getfacl test
#file:test
#owner:1001
#group:1001
user::rw-
group::r--
other::r--To change the ACL settings on this file,
invoke the &man.setfacl.1; utility. Observe:&prompt.user; setfacl -k testThe flag will remove all of the
currently defined ACLs from a file or file
system. The more preferable method would be to use
as it leaves the basic fields required for
ACLs to work.&prompt.user; setfacl -m u:trhodes:rwx,group:web:r--,o::--- testIn the aforementioned command, the
option was used to modify the default ACL
entries. Since there were no pre-defined entries, as they were
removed by the previous command, this will restore the default
options and assign the options listed. Take care to notice that
if you add a user or group which does not exist on the system,
an Invalid argument error will be printed
to stdout.TomRhodesContributed by FreeBSD Security Advisories&os; Security AdvisoriesLike many production quality operating systems, &os; publishes
Security Advisories. These advisories are usually
mailed to the security lists and noted in the Errata only
after the appropriate releases have been patched. This section
will work to explain what an advisory is, how to understand it,
and what measures to take in order to patch a system.What does an advisory look like?The &os; security advisories look similar to the one below,
taken from the &a.security-notifications.name; mailing list.=============================================================================
&os;-SA-XX:XX.UTIL Security Advisory
The &os; Project
Topic: denial of service due to some problem
Category: core
Module: sys
Announced: 2003-09-23
Credits: Person@EMAIL-ADDRESS
Affects: All releases of &os;
&os; 4-STABLE prior to the correction date
Corrected: 2003-09-23 16:42:59 UTC (RELENG_4, 4.9-PRERELEASE)
2003-09-23 20:08:42 UTC (RELENG_5_1, 5.1-RELEASE-p6)
2003-09-23 20:07:06 UTC (RELENG_5_0, 5.0-RELEASE-p15)
2003-09-23 16:44:58 UTC (RELENG_4_8, 4.8-RELEASE-p8)
2003-09-23 16:47:34 UTC (RELENG_4_7, 4.7-RELEASE-p18)
2003-09-23 16:49:46 UTC (RELENG_4_6, 4.6-RELEASE-p21)
2003-09-23 16:51:24 UTC (RELENG_4_5, 4.5-RELEASE-p33)
2003-09-23 16:52:45 UTC (RELENG_4_4, 4.4-RELEASE-p43)
2003-09-23 16:54:39 UTC (RELENG_4_3, 4.3-RELEASE-p39)
&os; only: NO
For general information regarding FreeBSD Security Advisories,
including descriptions of the fields above, security branches, and the
following sections, please visit
http://www.FreeBSD.org/security/.
I. Background
II. Problem Description
III. Impact
IV. Workaround
V. Solution
VI. Correction details
VII. ReferencesThe Topic field indicates exactly what the problem is.
It is basically an introduction to the current security
advisory and notes the utility with the
vulnerability.The Category refers to the affected part of the system
which may be one of core, contrib, or ports. The core
category means that the vulnerability affects a core
component of the &os; operating system. The contrib
category means that the vulnerability affects software
contributed to the &os; Project, such as
sendmail. Finally the ports
category indicates that the vulnerability affects add on
software available as part of the Ports Collection.The Module field refers to the component location, for
instance sys. In this example, we see that the module,
sys, is affected; therefore, this vulnerability
affects a component used within the kernel.The Announced field reflects the date said security
advisory was published, or announced to the world. This
means that the security team has verified that the problem
does exist and that a patch has been committed to the &os;
source code repository.The Credits field gives credit to the individual or
organization who noticed the vulnerability and reported
it.The Affects field explains which releases of &os; are
affected by this vulnerability. For the kernel, a quick
look over the output from ident on the
affected files will help in determining the revision.
For ports, the version number is listed after the port name
in /var/db/pkg. If the system does not
sync with the &os; CVS repository and rebuild
daily, chances are that it is affected.The Corrected field indicates the date, time, time
offset, and release that was corrected.The &os; only field indicates whether this vulnerability
affects just &os;, or if it affects other operating systems
as well.The Background field gives information on exactly what
the affected utility is. Most of the time this is why
the utility exists in &os;, what it is used for, and a bit
of information on how the utility came to be.The Problem Description field explains the security hole
in depth. This can include information on flawed code, or
even how the utility could be maliciously used to open
a security hole.The Impact field describes what type of impact the
problem could have on a system. For example, this could
be anything from a denial of service attack, to extra
privileges available to users, or even giving the attacker
superuser access.The Workaround field offers a feasible workaround to
system administrators who may be incapable of upgrading
the system. This may be due to time constraints, network
availability, or a slew of other reasons. Regardless,
security should not be taken lightly, and an affected system
should either be patched or the security hole workaround
should be implemented.The Solution field offers instructions on patching the
affected system. This is a step by step tested and verified
method for getting a system patched and working
securely.The Correction Details field displays the
CVS branch or release name with the
periods changed to underscore characters. It also shows
the revision number of the affected files within each
branch.The References field usually offers sources of other
information. This can included web URLs,
books, mailing lists, and newsgroups.